JP2020195535A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance performance amusement.SOLUTION: When it is determined that stock for a ready-to-win performance or stock for a targeting performance 2 is to be executed in second stock notice performance determination processing, a performance control board 120 executes an acquisition performance for acquiring a button single hitting icon and a button repeated hitting icon, executes a release performance for releasing the acquired button single hitting icon and button repeated hitting icon, and executes the ready-to-win performance and the targeting performance 2. When the button repeated hitting icon is acquired, a specific acquisition sound can be output.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

In the conventional gaming machine, when the starting prize is established, the determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player is acquired, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and the variation effect according to the result of the determination is executed, and when the variation effect becomes a special result, a special game is executed.

In the variable production, various productions are executed, and a device is made to raise the expectation that the special game is executed. Then, as such an effect, after stocking one or more benefits (for example, reach symbols), the stocked benefits are released to increase the expectation that the special game will be executed. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-106719

In the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, although a certain effect such as being able to pay attention to what kind of privilege is stocked can be expected, there is room for improvement in order to further improve the production interest.

An object of the present invention is to improve the entertainment of the production in view of such a situation.

In order to solve such a problem, the gaming machine according to the present invention acquires determination information based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting region in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game advantageous to the player. Means, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, an effect control means for executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination, and a sound output means capable of outputting sound. The effect control means has an acquisition effect of acquiring a game privilege when a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied, and a release effect of releasing the acquired game privilege when a predetermined release condition is satisfied after the acquisition is performed. And a predetermined effect according to the game privilege emitted by the release effect, and the sound output means outputs a specific acquired sound when the game privilege is acquired in the acquisition effect. There are cases where the specific acquired sound is not output.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the production interest.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of the game machine which opened the glass frame. It is a perspective view of the back side of a game machine. It is a block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table of a jackpot lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting data table at the end of a big hit game. It is a figure which shows an example of the special electric accessory operation mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big prize opening opening mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table of a big hit lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the table about a normal symbol and a startable movable piece. It is a figure which shows an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. It is a figure which shows the main process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game end processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the general electric control processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the auxiliary game processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process (1) in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process (2) in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table (low probability non-time saving game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table (high probability time saving game state). It is a figure which shows the jackpot notice effect determination processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice decision table before reach. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up pattern determination table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a notice determination table during reach, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a character group pattern determination table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a title pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in pattern determination table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a button pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a determination effect 2 pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the stock notice production decision processing in the production control unit. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first stock advance notice determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a second stock advance notice determination table. It is a figure which shows the 1st stock notice production decision processing in the production control unit. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the stock determination table for the variable icon, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the stock determination table for the title advance notice effect, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the stock determination table for the cut-in advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a stock determination table for development effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a stock determination table for determination effect 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the stock display mode determination table of the 1st stock notice effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd stock advance notice production decision processing in the production control unit. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a stock display mode determination table for tempai production, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a stock display mode determination table for tempai production. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a stock determination table for determination effect 2, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a stock display mode determination table for determination effect 2. It is a figure which shows the timer effect determination process in an effect control unit. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a change timer number determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an event timer number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the suggestion event determination table for one time of a timer. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first suggestion event determination table for two timers, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a second suggestion event determination table for two timers. It is a figure which shows an example of the update pattern determination table. This is a timing chart when one event timer effect is executed during the variable effect in which the SP reach effect is executed. This is a timing chart when one event timer effect is executed during the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed. It is a timing chart when the event timer effect is executed twice during the variation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which three timer effect is executed during the variation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which three timer effect is executed during the variation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which two timer effect is executed during the variation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which two timer effect is executed during the variation effect. It is a figure explaining the icon in the 1st stock production. It is a figure which shows the production example of the icon acquisition in the 1st stock production during the fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the icon emission in the 1st stock effect during a variable effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the icon emission in the 1st stock effect during a variable effect. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the icon emission in the 1st stock effect during a variable effect. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the icon acquisition and the effect example of the icon release in the 1st stock effect during the variable effect. It is a figure explaining the icon in the 2nd stock production. It is a figure which shows the production example of the icon acquisition in the 2nd stock production during the fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the icon emission in the 2nd stock effect during a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the icon change in the 2nd stock effect during a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the icon acquisition in the 2nd stock effect during the variation effect, and the other effect example of icon emission. It is a figure which shows the production example of the icon acquisition in the 3rd stock production during the fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the icon emission in the 3rd stock effect during a variable effect. It is a figure which shows the production example in a jackpot game.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of game machine 1)
First, the configuration of the game machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the game machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view of the game machine 1 in which the glass frame is opened according to the embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the game machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The game machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 60 attached to the island equipment of the game store, the outer frame 60, and a glass frame 50 rotatably supported (see FIGS. 1 and 2). Further, the outer frame 60 is provided with a game board 2 in which a game area 6 into which the game ball 200 flows down is formed.

The glass frame 50 includes an audio output device 32 composed of speakers, a frame lighting device 34b having a plurality of lamps (LEDs), an effect button 35 for changing an effect mode by a pressing operation, and at least two directions (this In the embodiment, a cross key 36 that can be pressed in four directions) is provided.

The audio output device 32 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like, and produces a sound effect. Further, the frame lighting device 34b is provided at a plurality of positions so as to produce an effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each lamp.

The effect button 35 is provided with an effect button detection switch 35a, and when the effect button detection switch 35a detects an operation of the player, further effect is executed in response to this operation. Similarly, the cross key 36 is also provided with a cross key detection switch 36b so that the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1 (see FIG. 4).
In particular, in the present embodiment, the effect button 35 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction by the effect button drive motor 35b (see FIG. 4).
An operation means having the same role as the effect button 35 may be separately provided. For example, an effect lever may be provided. When the effect lever is provided, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is given may be different depending on whether the effect button 35 is operated or the effect lever is operated.

Further, the glass frame 50 is provided with an operation handle 3 for firing a game ball toward the game area 6 by being rotated, and a saucer 40 for storing a plurality of game balls. , The operation handle 3 has a downward slope so that the game ball flows down (see FIG. 2). A receiving port for receiving a game ball is provided at the end of the downward slope of the saucer 40, and the game ball received by the receiving port is driven by a ball feed solenoid 4b to form a glass frame 50. The game balls are sent out one by one to the ball feed opening 41 provided on the back surface.

Then, the game ball sent out to the ball feed opening 41 is guided to the end of the downward slope of the launch rail 42 by the launch rail 42 having a downward slope toward the launching member 4c. A stopper 43 for stopping the game ball is provided above the end of the downward slope of the launch rail 42, and the game ball sent out from the ball feed opening 41 is the end of the downward slope of the launch rail 42. One game ball will be stopped at the section (see FIG. 2).

Then, when the player touches the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a (see FIG. 4) provided inside the operation handle 3 detects that the operation handle 3 and the player are in contact with each other. After that, when the player rotates the operation handle 3, the launch volume 3b directly connected to the operation handle 3 also rotates, and the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted by the launch volume 3b, and the launch ball is launched with the adjusted launch intensity. The launching member 4c directly connected to the solenoid 4a for rotation rotates. When the launching member 4c rotates, the launching member 4c launches the game ball 200 stored at the end of the downward slope of the launch rail 42, and the game ball is launched into the game area 6.

When the game ball launched as described above rises between the rails 5a and 5b from the launch rail 42 and exceeds the ball return prevention piece 5c, it reaches the game area 6 and then freely falls in the game area 6. To do. At this time, the game ball will fall unpredictably due to the plurality of nails and windmills provided in the game area 6.

In the game area 6 of the game board 2, various winning openings (general winning opening 12, ordinary symbol gate 13, first starting opening 14, second starting opening 15, first large winning opening 16, second large winning opening) 17), an image display device 31, and a decorative member 7 are provided so as to surround the display area of the image display device 31.

On the other hand, outside the game area 6 of the game board 2, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the normal symbol display device 22, and the first special symbol hold display 23 , A second special symbol holding display 24 and a normal symbol holding display 25 are provided.

At the lower left side of the game area 6, a game ball launched toward the left area of the game area 6 (so-called left-handed) can be won (winning), and is launched toward the right area of the game area 6. There are three general winning openings 12 in which a (so-called right-handed) game ball cannot be won, and a right-handed game ball can be won (winned) in the lower right side of 6 in the game area. Therefore, there is provided one general winning opening 12 in which a left-handed game ball cannot be won.

Here, each general winning opening 12 is provided with a general winning opening detection switch 12a for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 12 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out from the payout device for paying out the game ball. ..

In the lower center of the game area 6, a left-handed game ball can win a prize, and a right-handed game ball cannot win a prize. , And a second starting port 15 constituting a starting area in which a right-handed game ball can win (win) is provided side by side.

The second starting port 15 includes a starting movable piece 15b and a starting port opening / closing solenoid 15c that constitute an ordinary electric accessory (starting port opening / closing device) for facilitating winning of a game ball into the second starting port 15. It has a closed state (closed mode) in which the starting movable piece 15b stands vertically by the operation of the starting port opening / closing solenoid 15c to restrict the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15, and the starting movable piece. The 15b is tilted and converted to an open state (opening mode) in which the game ball is allowed to win a prize in the second starting port 15. When the second starting port 15 is in the open state, the starting movable piece 15b functions as a saucer for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 15, so that the game ball to the second starting port 15 is compared to when the second starting port 15 is in the closed state. The chances of winning a prize (winning ratio) will increase.

Here, the first starting port 14 is provided with the first starting port detection switch 14a for detecting the winning (winning ball) of the game ball, and the second starting port 15 is provided with the winning (winning ball) of the game ball. ) Is provided, and a second start port detection switch 15a is provided. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 is detected, a random value for jackpot determination for performing the "big hit lottery (big hit determination)" described later is acquired.

Further, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 is detected, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number value, a special symbol determination random value for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined. , The reach determination random value and the special symbol fluctuation random value for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol are also acquired. The jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure variation random value are referred to as special symbol determination information.

Further, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three game balls) are paid out from the payout device. Further, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) are paid out from the payout device. The number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the first starting port 14 may be the same as the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the second starting port 15.

On the left side and the right side of the game area 6, a normal symbol gate 13 forming a normal area through which a game ball can pass is provided.

Here, the normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting the passage (entry) of the game ball. Then, when the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, a hit determination random value for performing the "win lottery (hit determination)" described later is acquired.

Further, when the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, in addition to the above-mentioned hit determination random value, the normal symbol determination random value for determining the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are displayed. The random value for the fluctuation of the normal map for determination is also acquired. The hit judgment random value, the normal symbol determination random value, and the normal figure fluctuation random value are referred to as normal figure judgment information.

In the area on the right side of the game area 6, the right-handed game ball can win (win), and the left-handed game ball cannot win the first prize opening 16 and the second prize. The mouths 17 are provided vertically separated (with a width that allows the game ball to pass).

The first large winning opening 16 opens and closes the first large winning opening that constitutes the first special electric accessory (first large winning opening opening / closing device) for facilitating the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 16. It has a door 16b and a first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, and the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b stands substantially vertically by the operation of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c. Closed state that regulates the winning of the game ball to the first prize opening (closed mode) and open state that allows the game ball to win the first prize opening 16 by tilting the door 16b (opening mode). It is converted to and controlled. When the first large winning opening 16 is in the open state, the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b functions as a saucer for guiding the game ball to the first large winning opening 16, so that the first large winning opening 16 is compared with the closed state. The chances of winning a game ball into the winning opening 16 (winning ratio) will increase.

Here, the first large winning opening 16a is provided with a first large winning opening detection switch 16a for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 16 is detected, a preset number of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second large winning opening 17 opens and closes the second large winning opening that constitutes the second special electric accessory (second large winning opening opening / closing device) for facilitating the winning of the game ball into the second large winning opening 17. It has a door 17b and a second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c, and the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b stands substantially vertically by the operation of the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c to stand the second large winning opening 17b. Closed state (closed mode) that regulates the winning of the game ball to the second prize opening, and open state (opening mode) that allows the game ball to win the second prize opening 17 by tilting the door 17b. It is converted to and controlled. When the second large winning opening 17 is in the open state, the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b functions as a saucer for guiding the game ball to the second large winning opening 17, so that the second large winning opening 17 is compared with the closed state. The chances of winning a game ball to the winning opening 17 (winning ratio) will increase.

Here, the second large winning opening 17a is provided with a second large winning opening detection switch 17a for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the second large winning opening 17 is detected, a preset prize ball (for example, 15 game balls) is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the first large winning opening 16 may be different from the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the second large winning opening 17.

At the bottom of the game area 6, all of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first major winning opening 16, and the second major winning opening 17 are won (balls). An out port 11 is provided for discharging the unplayed game ball out of the game area.

Further, in the center of the game area 6, an image display device 31 configured by an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or the like is provided.

The image display device 31 displays a customer waiting effect image during standby when the game is not being performed, or displays a game effect image according to the progress of the game. Among them, three effect symbols 38 (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot in the variable effect described later are displayed in a variable manner, and a combination of specific effect symbols 38 (for example, 777, etc.) is displayed. ) Is stopped and displayed as a jackpot lottery result, and a combination other than a specific effect symbol 38 (for example, 289, etc.) is stopped and displayed as a jackpot lottery result. ..

The effect symbol 38 starts the variable display in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special symbol executed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. , The stop display is performed according to the stop display of the special symbol after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time. That is, the timing of the variable display between the effect symbol 38 and the special symbol and the timing of the stop display between the effect symbol 38 and the special symbol correspond to each other (they are at the same time).

Further, in the present embodiment, it varies regardless of whether the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 14 or when the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 15. In the effect, the effect symbol 38 of the same type is displayed in a variable manner or stopped. However, different types of effect symbols 38 are displayed in a variable manner or stopped when the game ball enters the first start port 14 and when the game ball enters the second start port 15. It may be configured.

Further, on the lower right side of the display unit of the image display device 31, three small effect symbols 48 for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot in the variation effect are scrolled in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in the present embodiment). It is displayed in a variable manner.

The variable display of the small effect symbol 48 is started in response to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and corresponds to the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And stop.
That is, the variation display of the small effect symbol 48 is performed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the variation state of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed. , The execution state of the variation display of the second special symbol is notified (suggested) to the player.

As with the effect symbol 38, the small effect symbol 48 is composed of, for example, symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "9", and in the stop display of the small effect symbol 48, the small effect symbol 48 is displayed. It is designed to stop for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same small effect symbols 48 such as "777" or a combination of small effect symbols 48 having regularity such as "357", and the loss mode is that. It is an aspect other than.

Further, in the display area of the image display device 31, among the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14, the big hit lottery (big hit determination) has not been executed (undetermined). For winning a game ball in the first hold icon display area 31a and the second start port 15 for displaying the first special symbol hold number (U1) indicating the number of figure judgment information as an icon so that the player can easily grasp it. Of the special figure judgment information acquired based on the above, the player can easily grasp the second special symbol hold number (U2) indicating the number of special figure judgment information for which the big hit lottery (big hit judgment) has not been executed (undetermined). The second hold icon display area 31b for displaying the icon, and the variable icon for displaying the information indicating the special figure determination information during the variable display (variable effect) so that the player can easily grasp the icon. A display area 31c is provided.

In the following description, the icons displayed in the first hold icon display area 31a and the second hold icon display area 31b are referred to as "hold icons (special figure judgment information for which jackpot judgment has not been executed and hold information). ”, The icon displayed in the variable icon display area 31c is“ the variable icon (the jackpot determination has been executed and the variation display (variation effect) is being executed, and the special figure determination information is executed. Equivalent to information) ".

The decorative member 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31 is provided with a wall portion erected from the game board 2 on the outer periphery thereof so that the game ball does not pass in front of the display area of the image display device 31. Has been done.

Further, on both the left and right sides of the decorative member 7, board lighting devices 34a having a plurality of lamps (LEDs and the like) are provided, and on the upper part of the decorative member 7, the "signboard" of the title (model name) of the game machine is provided. A first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) imitating "" is provided, and a second decorative member 33b (directing accessory) imitating a "sword" is provided on the right side of the decorative member 7.

The first decorative member 33a is driven by a panel drive device 33 composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like, and can move in the vertical direction. The vertical movement causes the first decorative member 33a to move to the front surface of the image display device 31. You can move. Similarly, the second decorative member 33b can also be driven by the panel drive device 33, tilt to the left with the lower portion of the second decorative member 33b as a fulcrum, and move to the front surface of the image display device 31. Further, the second decorative member 33b is composed of a sheath portion 33b1 that imitates a sheath and a blade portion 33b2 housed in the sheath, and the blade portion is driven by a board drive device 33 to move in the vertical direction. be able to.

A liquid crystal display may be provided on at least one of the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b, and the liquid crystal display may be provided with at least one of the hold icon display area and the variable icon display area. A hold icon display area may be provided on one of the liquid crystal display provided on the decorative member 33a and the liquid crystal display provided on the second decorative member 33b, and the variable icon display area may be provided on the other side.

The first special symbol display device 20 displays the lottery result (determination result) of the jackpot lottery (big hit determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 over a predetermined time for the first special symbol. The first special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed after the variable display is performed, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The second special symbol display device 21 displays the lottery result (determination result) of the jackpot lottery (big hit determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 over a predetermined time for the second special symbol. It is notified by stopping and displaying the second special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result after the variable display, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The first special symbol display device 20 and / or the second special symbol display device 21 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if a big hit is won, "7" may be stopped and displayed, and if it is lost, "-" may be stopped and displayed.

Here, the "big hit lottery" means that when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, a random value for jackpot determination is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination is used. It refers to a process (big hit determination) of determining whether a random value is a random value corresponding to a "big hit".

Further, in the present embodiment, the "big hit" is a big hit game (big hit game) in the big hit lottery executed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. It means that the player has acquired the right to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player.

In the "big hit game", a round game in which the first big winning opening 16 (first special electric accessory) or the second big winning opening 17 (second special electric accessory) is opened is a special electric accessory. Is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 16 times) by operating the accessory continuous operation device for continuously operating the above.

A predetermined time is set for the maximum opening time (operating time of the special electric accessory) of the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17 in each round game, and the first large winning opening is set during this time. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) are won (winned) in the winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17, one round game is completed. That is, the "big hit game" is a game in which a game ball wins (wins) in the first prize opening 16 or the second prize opening 17, and the player can acquire a prize ball corresponding to the winning ball. Is. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot games are provided, which will be described in detail later.

In addition, even if a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 during a variable display of a special symbol or during a big hit game (special game), the big hit lottery cannot be performed immediately. In that case, the right to the jackpot lottery is reserved under certain conditions.

More specifically, the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (wins) in the first start port 14 is stored as the first hold up to four, and the game is stored in the second start port 15. The special figure determination information acquired when the ball wins (wins) is stored as the second hold, up to a maximum of four. The number of the first special symbol hold (U1), which is the number of the first hold, and the number of the second special symbol hold (U2), which is the number of the second hold, are the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special, respectively. It is displayed on the symbol hold indicator 24.

When there is one first hold, the leftmost LED of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 lights up, and when there are two first holds, the leftmost end of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 is lit. Two LEDs light up. Further, when the first hold is three, the three LEDs from the leftmost end of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 blink and the right LED lights up, and when the first hold is four, the first Four LEDs are lit from the leftmost end of the special symbol hold indicator 23. Further, the second special symbol hold indicator 24 also displays the number of holds for the second hold in the same manner as described above.

Further, the normal symbol display device 22 provided outside the game area 6 of the game board 2 is a lottery result (determination) of a winning lottery (hit determination) performed when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13. The result) is notified by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner over a predetermined time and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members composed of LEDs and the like. Has been done.

Here, the "hit lottery" is a random value for hit determination when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, and the acquired random value for hit determination corresponds to "hit". It refers to the process of determining whether or not (hit determination).

Further, in the present embodiment, "hit" means that the player has acquired the right to execute an auxiliary game that is advantageous to the player in the winning lottery that is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 13. Say. In the "auxiliary game", the startable movable piece 15b of the second start port 15 is converted and controlled into an open state for a predetermined time. That is, the "auxiliary game" is a game in which a game ball wins (wins) a prize ball at the second starting port 15, and the player can acquire a prize ball corresponding to the prize. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games are provided, which will be described in detail later.

In addition, as with the special symbol, if the winning lottery cannot be performed immediately even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 such as during the variable display of the normal symbol or during the auxiliary game, under certain conditions. The right to the winning lottery is reserved.

More specifically, the normal symbol determination information acquired when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 is stored as the third hold, up to a maximum of four. The number of ordinary symbol hold indicators (G), which is the number of the third hold, is displayed on the ordinary symbol hold indicator 25 in the same manner as the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24. Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the glass frame 50 supports a glass plate 52 that visually covers the game area 6 in front of the game board 2 (on the player side). The glass plate 52 is detachably fixed to the glass frame 50.

The glass frame 50 is connected to the outer frame 60 via the hinge mechanism 51 on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, on the left side facing the game machine 1), and is connected to the outer frame 60 with the hinge mechanism 51 as a fulcrum in the left-right direction. The other end side (for example, the right side facing the game machine 1) can be rotated in the direction of opening from the outer frame 60. The glass frame 50 covers the game board 2 together with the glass plate 52, and rotates like a door with the hinge mechanism portion 51 as a fulcrum, so that the inner portion of the outer frame 60 including the game board 2 can be opened.

On the other end side of the glass frame 50 in the left-right direction, a lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the glass frame 50 to the outer frame 60 is provided. The lock by the lock mechanism can be released with a special key. Further, the glass frame 50 is also provided with a door opening switch 133 for detecting whether or not the glass frame 50 is opened from the outer frame 60.

Then, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 140, a game information output terminal board 30, and the like are provided on the back surface of the game machine 1. Further, the power supply board 140 is provided with a power plug 141 for supplying electric power to the game machine 1, a frame control board 180 (not shown), and a power switch.

(Overall block diagram of game machine 1)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the entire block diagram of the game machine 1 of FIG. FIG. 4 is an overall block diagram of the game machine 1.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operation (progress) of the game, inputs various detection signals such as the first start port detection switch 14a, and inputs the first special symbol display device 20 and the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c. Etc. are driven to control the game.

The main control board 110 is connected to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 130, and the power supply board 140. The communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 is configured so that data can be communicated in only one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 Communication is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. Further, the main control board 110 inputs the power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

Further, the main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores various data and tables required for game control programs and game control, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It includes at least a built-in one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control, and a RAM clear switch 111a.

The main control input port includes a payout control board 130, a RAM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c, and a general for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 12. Winning port detection switch 12a, gate detection switch 13a for detecting that a game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 13, first start port detection switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has entered the first start port 14, 2 The second start opening detection switch 15a for detecting that a game ball has entered the start opening 15, the first major winning opening detection switch 16a for detecting that a game ball has entered the first major winning opening 16, A second special winning opening detection switch 17a for detecting that a game ball has entered the two major winning openings 17 is connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 110 by the input port for main control.

Further, the output port for the main control includes an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a start port opening / closing solenoid 15c for opening / closing the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15, and a first winning opening opening / closing door 16b. The first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c to operate, the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c to operate the second winning opening opening / closing door 17b, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device for displaying special symbols. 21, a normal symbol display device 22 for displaying a normal symbol, a first special symbol hold indicator 23 and a second special symbol hold indicator 24 for displaying the number of hold of a special symbol, and a normal symbol hold for displaying the number of hold of a normal symbol. A display 25, a game information output terminal board 30 for outputting an external information signal, and the like are connected. Various signals are output by this output port for main control.

Based on the input signals from each detection switch and timer, the main CPU 110a reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b and performs arithmetic processing, directly controls each device and display, or produces the result of arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly.

In the main ROM 110b, in addition to the game control program, the jackpot determination table used for the jackpot lottery (see FIG. 5), the special symbol determination table for determining the special symbol to be stopped and displayed (see FIG. 6), and the jackpot end. Big hit game end setting data table for determining the later game state (see FIG. 7), special electric accessory operating mode determination table for determining the opening / closing conditions of the large winning opening opening / closing door (see FIG. 8), large winning opening Opening mode table (see FIG. 9), special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol (see FIG. 10), pre-judgment table for jackpot lottery (see FIG. 11), hit determination table referred to for the winning lottery. (See FIG. 12) and the like are stored.
It should be noted that the above-mentioned table is merely a list of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment as an example, and a large number of tables and programs (not shown) are provided in the progress of the game. ing.

In the main RAM 110c, a special figure special electric processing data storage area, a general figure general electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol holding number (G) storage area, a normal symbol holding storage area, a stopped normal symbol data storage area, and a first special symbol holding Number (U1) storage area, second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, first jackpot determination random value storage area, second jackpot determination random value storage area, round game count (R) storage area, open count (K) Storage area, large winning opening winning ball counter (C) storage area, second starting opening winning ball counter (D), start opening count counter, high probability game flag storage area, time saving game flag storage area, high probability game Number of times (X) storage area, time saving game number of times (J) storage area, game state buffer, stop special figure data storage area, stop normal figure data storage area, transmission data storage area for production, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter , Various timer counters such as auxiliary game timer counters are provided.
The above-mentioned storage area is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 30 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated by the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 to a hall computer or the like of a game store. The game information output terminal board 30 is connected to the main control board 110 by wiring, and is provided with a plurality of connectors (terminals) for connecting external information to a hall computer or the like of a game store.

The effect control board 120 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or on standby, and has an effect control unit 120 m that comprehensively manages the contents of the effect of the game, and an image control that controls the display of an image in the image display device 31. It includes a unit 150, a drive control unit 160 that controls drive of a solenoid, a motor, etc. in the panel drive device 33, and a lamp control unit 170 that controls lighting of LEDs and the like in the panel lighting device 34a.

The effect control board 120 is connected to the main control board 110, the power supply board 140, and the frame control board 180. The communication between the effect control board 120 and the frame control board 180 is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions, and the effect control board 120 inputs the power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

The effect control unit 120m includes a sub CPU 120a, a sub ROM 120b, and a sub RAM 120c.

The sub CPU 120a is stored in the sub ROM 120b based on a command received from the main control board 110 or an input signal from the effect button detection switch 35a, the cross key detection switch 36b, etc. received from the frame control board 180 described later. The program is read out and arithmetic processing is performed, and based on the processing, instructions are given to the image control unit 150, the drive control unit 160, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180 to execute various effects. (Send data).

For example, when the sub CPU 120a receives a variation pattern designation command indicating a variation mode of a special symbol from the main control board 110, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the content of the received variation pattern designation command, and analyzes the contents of the received variation pattern designation command, and the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the panel. The effect data (such as an effect pattern designation command described later) for causing the drive device 33, the panel lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, and the effect button drive motor 35b to execute a predetermined effect is determined. Then, the determined effect data is transmitted to the image control unit 150, the drive control unit 160, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180 to perform control for executing the variation effect.

In the sub ROM 120b, in addition to the program for controlling the effect, a variable effect pattern determination table for determining the variable effect pattern for executing the variable effect is stored in the sub ROM 120b. It should be noted that the above-mentioned table is merely a list of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment as an example, and a large number of tables and programs (not shown) are provided in the progress of the game. ing.

The sub RAM 120c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 120a, and has a plurality of storage areas.

The image control unit 150 is connected to the image display device 31, and controls the display of the image in the image display device 31 based on various effect data transmitted from the effect control unit 120 m (sub CPU 120a). At this time, a general-purpose substrate 39 having a bridge function of converting the image data into a predetermined image format and outputting the image data is provided between the image control unit 150 and the image display device 31.

The general-purpose board 39 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the image display device 31 that displays image data. For example, a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots). Absorbs the difference in resolution between when the image display device 31 is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected as the image display device 31.

The image control unit 150 includes a liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a liquid crystal control RAM 150b, a liquid crystal control ROM 150c, a drawing control unit 151 (VDP: an abbreviation for Video Display Processor), a CGROM 152, a VRAM 153, and a crystal oscillator 154.

The liquid crystal control CPU 150a creates a display list composed of drawing control command groups based on the effect data (effect pattern designation command, etc.) transmitted from the effect control unit 120 m, and sends this display list to the drawing control unit 151. An instruction is given to display the image data stored in the CGROM 152 on the image display device 31 by transmitting the data.

Further, when the liquid crystal control CPU 150a receives the V blank interrupt signal or the drawing end signal from the drawing control unit 151, the liquid crystal control CPU 150a appropriately performs interrupt processing.

The liquid crystal control RAM 150b is built in the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, and temporarily stores the data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 150c.

Further, the liquid crystal control ROM 150c is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and is a control processing program of the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and an animation of the production using an image corresponding to the production data. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for displaying the image are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation, and stores the combination of the animation scene information of the image corresponding to the production data, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In addition, the weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and effect image are displayed in the animation scene information. Information such as information that specifies the display device is stored.

The CGROM 152 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 pixels × 32 pixels). doing. Note that this pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 152 is read out in image data units by the drawing control unit 151, and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 152 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 152 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The crystal oscillator 154 outputs a pulse signal to the drawing control unit 151, and by dividing the pulse signal, the system clock for the drawing control unit 151 to control and synchronization with the image display device 31 are achieved. A signal or the like is generated.

The VRAM 153 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data. The VRAM 153 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a frame buffer area corresponding to the image display device 31, and the like.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. Then, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

The drawing control unit 151 is a so-called image processor, and draws image data stored in the CGROM 152 in the “drawing frame buffer” of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 153 based on an instruction (display list) from the liquid crystal control CPU 150a. Further, the drawing control unit 151 reads image data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area. Then, a video signal (LVDS signal, RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read image data, and is output to the image display device 31 for display.

The drive control unit 160 is connected to the panel drive device 33, and drives a solenoid, a motor, etc. in the panel drive device 33 based on various production data transmitted from the effect control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). Control. Then, by driving and controlling the board driving device 33, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b provided on the game board 2 are driven.

The lamp control unit 170 is connected to the panel lighting device 34a, and controls the lighting of LEDs and the like in the panel lighting device 34a based on various production data transmitted from the effect control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). Do. Then, by controlling the lighting of the board lighting device 34a, the board lighting device 34a provided on the game board 2 is turned on and off.

The frame control board 180 controls the effect of the sound output device 32 provided on the glass frame 50, the frame lighting device 34b, and the effect button 35.

The frame control board 180 is connected to the effect control board 120 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the frame control board 180 and the effect control board 120 is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. The frame control board 180 inputs the power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

The frame control board 180 controls to output predetermined audio data to the audio output device 32 based on various effect data transmitted from the effect control board 120, and lights an LED or the like in the frame lighting device 34b. It controls and controls the drive of the effect button drive motor 35b. By the control of the frame control board 180, the sound output device 32 provided on the glass frame 50 outputs sound, the frame lighting device 34b is turned on and off, and the effect button 35 moves in the vertical direction. ..

Further, when the frame control board 180 inputs the input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross key detection switch 36b, the frame control board 180 transmits the input signals to the effect control board 120. That is, the effect control board 120 inputs the input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross key detection switch 36b via the frame control board 180.

The payout control board 130 includes a payout control unit 131 that controls payout of the game ball and a launch control unit 132 that controls the launch of the game ball.

The payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 110 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the payout control board 130 and the main control board 110 is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. The payout control board 130 inputs the power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

The payout control unit 131 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer composed of a payout CPU 131a, a payout ROM 131b, and a payout RAM 131c.

The payout CPU 131a reads the program stored in the payout ROM 131b and performs arithmetic processing based on the payout ball count detection switch 135 for detecting whether or not the game ball has been paid out, the door open switch 133, and the input signal from the timer. At the same time, the corresponding payout data is transmitted to the main control board 110 based on the process.

Further, a payout motor 134 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage portion of the game balls is connected to the output side of the payout control board 130. The payout CPU 131a reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM 131b and performs arithmetic processing based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and controls the payout motor 134 of the payout device to play a predetermined game ball. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 131c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 131a.

In the launch control unit 132, the touch sensor 3a and the launch volume 3b are connected to the input side, and the launch solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b are connected to the output side. The firing control unit 132 inputs a touch signal from the touch sensor 3a and controls the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b to be energized based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 3b.

The touch sensor 3a is provided inside the operation handle 3, and is composed of a capacitance type proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance when the player touches the operation handle 3. When the touch sensor 3a detects that the player has touched the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a outputs a touch signal permitting the firing solenoid 4a to be energized to the firing control unit 132. As a major premise, the launch control unit 132 is configured so that the game ball 200 is not launched into the game area 6 unless a touch signal is input from the touch sensor 3a.

The firing volume 3b is provided directly connected to a rotating portion in which the operation handle 3 rotates, and is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 3b divides the constant voltage (for example, 5V) applied to the firing volume 3b by a variable resistor and supplies the divided voltage to the firing control unit 132 (the voltage supplied to the firing control unit 132). Variable). The launch control unit 132 energizes the launch solenoid 4a based on the voltage divided by the launch volume 3b, and rotates the launch member 4c directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a to play the game ball 200. Fire in area 6.

The launching solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid, and a launching member 4c is directly connected to the launching solenoid 4a. When the launching solenoid 4a rotates, the launching member 4c is rotated.

Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 132. As a result, the number of firing games per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one is fired for each rotation of the firing solenoid. That is, one game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

The ball feed solenoid 4b is composed of a straight-moving solenoid, and feeds the game balls in the saucer 40 one by one toward the launching member 4c directly connected to the launching solenoid 4a.

The power supply board 140 includes a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the game machine 1, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, The power failure detection signal is output to the main control board 110. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal reaches a high level, the main CPU 110a is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal becomes a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state. The backup power supply is not limited to the capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or the capacitor and the battery may be used in combination.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the jackpot lottery has a "low probability gaming state" and the "high probability gaming state", and the state relating to the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is a "non-time saving gaming state". It has a "time saving game state". The state related to the jackpot lottery (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) and the state related to the startable movable piece 15b (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state) can be related to each other or can be made independent. it can. In other words
(1) "Low-probability time-saving game state", which is a low-probability game state and time-saving game state,
(2) "Low-probability non-time-saving game state", which is a low-probability game state and non-time-saving game state,
(3) "High-probability time-saving game state", which is a high-probability game state and time-saving game state,
(4) It is possible to provide a "high-probability non-time-saving game state" which is a high-probability non-time-saving game state and a non-time-saving game state.
The game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the game machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving game state", and this game state is set to the "normal game state" in the present embodiment. I will call it.

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means that the jackpot winning probability is the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. For example, it refers to a gaming state set as low as 1/300. On the other hand, the "high probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set as high as, for example, 1/60. Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". The change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed.

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "time saving game". It refers to a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 15 is short and easy to be set when the player wins a prize. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, a winning lottery is performed and the normal symbol display device 22 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, but the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, for example, 30 seconds after the start of the variable display. It will be stopped and displayed later. Then, when the lottery result is successful, the second starting port 15 is controlled in the open mode for 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "non-time saving game". It refers to a gaming state that is set shorter than the "state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 15 when winning is set to be, for example, 3 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time saving gaming state". Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is set as low as 1/16, and in the "time saving game state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is as high as 15/16, for example. Set. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, the second starting port 15 is more likely to be controlled in the open state than in the "non-time-saving game state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time-saving game state" has more advantages than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery. It is set. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery is advantageous.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12.

(Big hit judgment table of big hit lottery)
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table. Specifically, FIG. 5A is a jackpot determination table for a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 14, and FIG. 5B is a jackpot determination table for the second starting port 15. It is a jackpot judgment table of a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball. In the tables of FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b), the jackpot probabilities are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the jackpot determination table is associated with the probability game state, the jackpot determination random value, and the jackpot determination result.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b), and is a "big hit" based on the current probability game state and the acquired random number value for jackpot determination. It is judged whether it is "missing" or "missing".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5A, in the low probability gaming state, the two jackpot determination random values "7" and "8" are determined to be jackpots. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, 10 jackpot determination random numbers from "7" to "16" are determined to be jackpots. If the random value is other than the above, it is determined to be "missing".

Therefore, since the random number range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 599, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/300, and it is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability gaming state. The probability is increased by 5 times to 1/60.

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of variable display. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a special symbol determination table for losing, and FIG. 6B is a special symbol determination table for jackpots.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the special symbol determination table in the loss is acquired when the type of the special symbol display device and the game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. The random value for determining the special symbol and the lost special symbol (stop special symbol data) are associated with each other. In addition, a plurality of lost special symbols and a random value for determining a special symbol may be associated with each other so that a plurality of special symbols can be determined even in the case of loss.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the special symbol determination table in the jackpot, the type of the special symbol display device (type of the starting port in which the game ball has won a prize) and the first starting port 14 or the second starting The special symbol determination random value acquired when the game ball enters the mouth 15 is associated with the jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data).

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6 and determines the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data) based on the type of the special symbol display device, the random value for determining the special symbol, and the like.

Then, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect symbol designation command as the information of the special symbol is determined based on the determined type of the special symbol (stop special symbol data). Here, in the effect symbol specification command, one command is composed of two bytes of data, one byte of MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and one byte of DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. This also applies to the fluctuation pattern specification command and the like, which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, the type of special symbol (stop special diagram data) determines the game state after the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 7) and the type of the jackpot game (see FIG. 8). , It can be said that the type of the special symbol determines the game state and the type of the jackpot game after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, in the column of the special symbol in FIG. 6B, the explanation corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is supplementarily described.

(Setting data table at the end of the jackpot game)
FIG. 7 is a data table set at the end of the jackpot game for determining the game state after the jackpot game ends.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the jackpot game end setting data table, the stop special figure data of the special symbol, the game state buffer, the time-saving game state, the time-saving game count (J), the probability game state, and the high probability The number of games (X) is associated with it.

Here, the "game state buffer" is information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state is composed of a combination of a time-saving gaming state (or non-time-saving gaming state) and a high-probability gaming state (or low-probability gaming state).

Specifically, when the game state buffer is "00H", the game state information of the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state in which both the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag are not set is shown. If the game state buffer is "01H", the time-saving game flag is not set, but the high-probability game flag is set to indicate the game state information of the high-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state. When the game state buffer is "02H", it indicates the game state information of the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state in which the time-saving game flag is set but the high-probability game flag is not set. When the game state buffer is "03H", it indicates the game state information of the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state in which both the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag are set.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game end time setting data table shown in FIG. 7, and based on the stop special figure data of the special symbol and the game state buffer, the time-saving game state, the time-saving game count (J), and the probability. The game state and the number of high-probability games (X) are determined.

A feature of the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7 in the present embodiment is that after all jackpot games are completed, a high-probability game state is determined until the jackpot lottery is performed 80 times. ..

Further, as a feature of the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, even if the stop special figure data of the same special symbol is used, it is based on the information stored in the game state buffer (game state at the time of winning the jackpot). , It is possible to set the time saving game flag and make the number of time saving games (J) different.

For example, when the stop special symbol data of the special symbol is the stop special symbol data 04 (special symbol 4), the game state buffer has a low probability game state and a non-time reduction with respect to the time reduction game flag and the time reduction game count (J). If the game state information (00H) indicating the game state is stored, the time-saving game flag is not set after the jackpot ends, and the time-saving game number (J) is also set to 0. On the other hand, if the game status information (02H, 03H, or 04H) other than the above is stored in the game status buffer, the time-saving game flag is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the time-saving game count (J) is set. Is set to 80 times.

As a result, the number of time-saving games (J) can be changed according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit, and the player can be interested in the game state at the time of winning the big hit.

(Special electric accessory operation mode determination table)
FIG. 8 is a special electric accessory operation mode determination table for determining the grand prize opening opening mode table. As will be described later, since the jackpot game is executed based on this jackpot opening mode table, it can be said that the jackpot opening mode table indicates the type of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the term "table" is appropriately abbreviated as "TBL".

As shown in FIG. 8, in the special electric accessory operation mode determination table, the stop special figure data of the special symbol and the large winning opening opening mode table are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a will refer to the special electric accessory operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8 and determine the special winning opening opening mode table based on the stop special figure data of the special symbol.

(Large winning opening opening mode table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the configuration of the large winning opening opening mode table determined in FIG. 8, depending on the large winning opening opening mode table, the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b. Opening and closing conditions are determined.

Specifically, it is a group of jackpot opening mode determination tables for jackpots that is referred to during a jackpot game, and is composed of a first jackpot table, a second jackpot table, a third jackpot table, and a fourth jackpot table. Has been done.

In the large winning opening opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 9, the type of large winning opening to be opened (first large winning opening 16 or second large winning opening 17) and the maximum number of round games in one big hit game are displayed. And the specified number that indicates the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening in one round, the opening time from the start of the big hit game to the execution of the first round game, and the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening in each round game , One opening time of the big winning opening in each round game, one closing time of the big winning opening in each round game, the interval time until the next round game is executed, and the end of the last round game The ending time from to the end of the jackpot game is associated.

The main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game based on the first jackpot table, executes the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot table, executes the third jackpot game based on the third jackpot table, and executes the third jackpot game. The fourth jackpot game will be executed based on the four jackpot table.

According to the first jackpot table shown in FIG. 9, the first jackpot opening / closing door 16b is operated to open the first jackpot 16 on the right side of the game area 6 for up to 29 seconds per round. The first jackpot game can be executed. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the first large winning opening 16 by the time when the opening time has passed 29 seconds, the game of one round is completed. Then, when the 16-round game is completed, the first jackpot game is completed.

Further, according to the second big hit table shown in FIG. 9, the second big winning opening opening / closing door 17b is operated to open / close the second big winning opening 17 a plurality of times (K = 3) for one round. (The second big winning opening 17 repeats opening for 3 seconds and closing for 1 second) can execute the second big hit game. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the second large winning opening 17 before the maximum number of open times is reached, one round of games will end. Then, when the 4-round game is completed, the second big hit game is completed.

Further, the third jackpot table shown in FIG. 9 is different in that the data is set in the same manner as the third jackpot table, but the maximum number of round games is set larger than that of the third jackpot table. .. Therefore, the third jackpot game is a jackpot game that is more advantageous than the second jackpot game.

According to the 4th big hit table shown in FIG. 9, the 1st big winning opening opening / closing door 16b is operated to open the 1st big winning opening 16 on the right side of the game area 6 for 2 rounds (twice) at maximum 0. It is possible to execute the fourth big hit game in which the opening of .052 seconds is performed. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the first large winning opening 16 by the time the opening time elapses 0.052 seconds, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the two-round game is completed, the fourth big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, four types of "big hit games (special games)" are provided, from the first big hit game to the fourth big hit game, in which the opening operation of the big winning opening and the opening operation of the big winning opening are different. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various special games.

Further, since the opening time (0.052 seconds) of the fourth big hit game is shorter than the time (about 0.6 seconds) in which one game ball is launched as described above, the opening / closing door 16b of the first big winning opening is Even if it operates, it is difficult to win the first prize opening 16. Therefore, the fourth jackpot game can be said to be a "disadvantageous opening mode". On the other hand, the opening time of the first jackpot game (29 seconds) and the opening time of the second and third jackpot games (3 seconds) are longer than the time when one game ball is fired (about 0.6 seconds). It can be said to be an "advantageous opening mode".

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern (variation time, etc.) of a special symbol as will be described later. Note that FIG. 10 is, for example, a special figure variation pattern determination table referred to in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, and is also a special figure variation pattern determination table referred to in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (not shown). "DATA" in the variation pattern designation command is "51H" to "61H") and the like are stored in the main ROM 110b.

As shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes a special symbol display device (type of start port), a jackpot determination result, a special symbol (stop special symbol data), a random value for reach determination, and a special symbol. The number of holds (U1 or U2), the random value for special symbol variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "variation pattern of the special symbol" determines at least the determination result of the jackpot and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, since the reach is always performed at the time of a big hit, the reach determination random value is not referred to at the time of a big hit. The reach determination random number value has a random number range set to 97 (0 to 96), and the special figure variation random number value has a random number range set to 100 (0 to 99).

Further, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the variation pattern (1) (normal variation) so that the average variation time of the special symbol becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols (U1 or U2) increases. ), The fluctuation time (T2) of the fluctuation pattern (2) (shortening fluctuation) is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time (T1). For example, the fluctuation time (T1) of the fluctuation pattern (1) (normal fluctuation) is set to 12 seconds, and the fluctuation time (T2) of the fluctuation pattern (2) (shortening fluctuation) is set to 3 seconds. The maximum number of balls "4" may be stored as the number of reserved special symbols, but the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved special symbols. Therefore, "4" is not referred to as the pending number.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, and refers to a special symbol display device (type of starting port), a lottery result of a jackpot lottery, a special symbol to be stopped, and a special symbol hold number (U1 or U2). ), The variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation time of the special symbol are determined based on the reach determination random value and the special symbol variation random value.

Then, based on the determined variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command of the special symbol is generated, and the information of the variation pattern of the special symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 120.

Here, the variation pattern designation command of the special symbol is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the command and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is "E6H", a command for specifying a variation pattern of the special symbol of the first special symbol display device 20 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 14 is shown, and the MODE data is used as the MODE data. When it is "E7H", a command for designating a variation pattern of the special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 15 is shown.

Further, in the effect control board 120, as will be described later, the effect content such as the effect symbol 38 is determined based on the variation pattern (variation pattern designation command) of the special symbol. In the rightmost column of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the effect contents such as the effect symbol 38 are described for reference.

Here, as the production contents, "normal fluctuation" and "shortening fluctuation" mean that a plurality of production symbols 38 fluctuate apart at high speed and stop without reaching, and are referred to as normal fluctuation. It differs from the shortened fluctuation in that the shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation.

Further, "reach" is a variation mode that gives the player a sense of expectation of a jackpot, such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols 38 that notifies the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 38 fluctuate. Means. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols 38 of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 38 for notifying a big hit, the two effect symbols 38 are temporarily stopped at "7", and the remaining effects A mode in which the symbol 38 is fluctuating. The "temporary stop" means a mode in which the effect symbol 38 sways slightly or the effect symbol 38 is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 38 is stopped.

Further, "normal reach" means a reach with a low expectation (hereinafter referred to as "big hit expectation") in which a jackpot game in which two effect symbols 38 are temporarily stopped and the remaining one effect symbol 38 fluctuates is executed. doing. In this embodiment, the "normal reach" does not make a big hit, but the "normal reach" may make a big hit.
In addition, "SP reach" means a super reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than a normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which the effect symbol 38 that has not been temporarily stopped makes a special change or a special character is displayed.
In addition, "SPSP reach" means a special reach that is performed after the super reach and has a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach.
Further, the "full rotation reach" means a mode in which the combination of a plurality of effect symbols 38 for notifying the jackpot changes at a low speed in a state where all the combinations are aligned, and in the present embodiment, only when the jackpot lottery is won. It means reach to be executed.

In addition, the "pseudo-continuous notice" means the "number of executions of the pseudo-continuous notice", and the "pseudo-continuous notice" is produced during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one big hit lottery. This means a notice in a variation mode in which the symbol 38 is temporarily stopped and then changed again to perform the variation and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 38 a plurality of times.

(Preliminary judgment table for big hit lottery)
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for predetermining the result of the jackpot lottery. The pre-determination table of FIG. 11 is a pre-determination table referred to in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, and the table referred to in the high-probability time-saving game state or the like is separately stored in the main ROM 110b.

As shown in FIG. 11, the pre-judgment table includes a special symbol display device (type of starting port), a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for reach determination, and a random number for special symbol fluctuation. Numerical values and scheduled fluctuation patterns are associated with each other.

Here, it is possible to determine in advance whether the ball is "big hit" or "missing" by the big hit judgment random value acquired at the time of entering the starting port of the game ball, and the special symbol type (big hit) by the special symbol determination random value. Special symbols, lost special symbols) can be determined in advance.
Furthermore, since the planned fluctuation pattern (the content of the effect such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach) can be determined in advance by the reach determination random value and the special figure variation random value, the start opening prize designation command can be used. It is possible to include the type of jackpot and the scheduled fluctuation pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 11, and refers to a special symbol display device (type of starting port), a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for reach determination, and a special symbol variation. The planned fluctuation pattern is determined based on the random value. Then, a start opening winning designation command is generated according to the determined scheduled fluctuation pattern.

This start opening prize designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the command and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is "E8H", the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 14 is shown, and when the MODE data is "E9H", the second start is started. The starting mouth winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball is shown in the mouth 15.

The pre-determination table shown in FIG. 11 is similar to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. However, the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 11 is used when the game ball enters the starting port, whereas the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10 is used at the start of variation of the special symbol. There is. In addition, there is a difference whether or not to refer to the "number of pending".
Therefore, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 11, the type of jackpot or reach can be discriminated, but it is impossible to discriminate between "normal fluctuation" and "shortening fluctuation"("normalfluctuation" and "shortening fluctuation" shown in FIG. 11 ". Scheduled fluctuation pattern ”).

Further, the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 11 is a pre-judgment table for a jackpot lottery referred to in a low-probability gaming state, but although not shown, a pre-judgment table for a jackpot lottery referred to in a high-probability gaming state is also available. It is stored in the main ROM 110b.
The jackpot lottery pre-judgment table referred to in the high-probability gaming state has the same configuration as the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 11, but determines in advance whether it is a "big hit" or a "miss". The value of the random value for jackpot judgment to do is different.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a table relating to a normal symbol and a startable movable piece 15b of the second start port 15. Specifically, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a hit determination table of a winning lottery, and FIG. 12B is a normal symbol for determining the type of normal symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of variable display. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table. Further, FIG. 12 (c) shows a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and FIG. 12 (d) shows an opening mode of the startable movable piece 15b when a winning lottery is won. It is a figure which shows the start opening opening mode determination table for determination.

(Collision detection table for winning lottery)
As shown in FIG. 12A, the hit determination table is associated with the presence / absence of a time-saving game state, a random value for hit determination, and a hit determination result.

The main CPU 110a refers to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 12 (a), and determines whether it is a “hit” or a “loss” based on the current time-saving game state and the acquired random value for the hit determination. judge. For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 12 (a), in the non-time saving game state, one specific hit determination random value of "0" is determined to be a hit. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, 15 hit determination random values from "0" to "14" are determined to be hits. If the random value is other than the above, it is determined to be "missing". Therefore, since the random number range of the random number value for hit determination is 0 to 15, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the non-time-saving game state is 1/16, and the probability of being determined to be a hit in the time-saving game state is 15. / 16.

(Ordinary design determination table)
As shown in FIG. 12B, the presence / absence of the time-saving game state, the hit determination result, the random value for determining the normal symbol, and the normal symbol (stopped normal symbol data) are associated with each other in the normal symbol determination table. There is.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 12B, and stops and displays the normal symbol based on the current time-saving game state, the hit determination result, and the acquired normal symbol determination random value. Determine (stop map data).

Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the main CPU 110a determines the normal symbol designation command as the information of the normal symbol based on the determined type of the normal symbol (stop normal symbol data), and determines the normal symbol designation command. Will be transmitted to the effect control board 120.

Here, as shown in FIG. 12D, since the opening mode of the start movable piece 15b is determined by the normal symbol (stop normal symbol data), the type of the normal symbol determines the opening mode of the start movable piece 15b. It can be said that it will be decided.

(Public map fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 12 (c) is a diagram showing a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time, etc.) of a normal symbol as will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 12 (c), the presence / absence of the time saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, the random value for the normal figure change, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are associated with each other in the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table. ing.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 (c), and based on the current time-saving game state, the hit determination result, and the acquired random number value for normal figure change, the normal symbol Determine the fluctuation time.

Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the main CPU 110a determines the normal symbol fluctuation designation command as the information of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the determined fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and determines the normal symbol fluctuation designation command. Will be transmitted to the effect control board 120.

As a feature of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 (c), the fluctuation time of the time-saving gaming state (3 seconds or 5 seconds) is the fluctuation time of the non-time-saving gaming state (30 seconds or 40 seconds). It is configured to be shorter than.

(Starting port opening mode determination table for movable pieces)
As shown in FIG. 12 (d), the start port opening mode determination table includes the stop normal figure data (normal symbol), the maximum number of times the start movable piece 15b is opened, the opening time of the auxiliary game, and the second start port 15. The opening time, the interval time, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the start port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 12 (d), and based on the stop chart data, the maximum number of times the start movable piece 15b is opened, the opening time, the opening time, the closing time, the interval time, Determine the ending time.

In the present embodiment, in the start port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 12D, the starting port opening mode based on the stop chart data = 02 is more advantageous than the starting mouth opening mode based on the stop chart data = 01. It is an opening mode, and the opening mode based on the stop chart data = 03 is more advantageous than the starting port opening mode based on the stop chart data = 02.

Then, as shown in the normal symbol determination table of FIG. 12B, when a hit occurs in the time-saving game state, the stop normal map data = 03, which is the most advantageous opening mode, is selected. As a result, in the time-saving game state, the startable movable piece 15b operates more favorably to the player than in the non-time-saving game state.

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 13A shows special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination, special symbol determination) acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a special figure determination information storage area in which a random number value, a random value for reach determination, and a random value for special figure variation) are stored, and FIG. 13 (b) shows each storage unit of the special figure determination information storage area. FIG. 13 (c) is a diagram showing a configuration, in which FIG. 13 (c) shows the normal symbol determination information (hit determination random value, normal symbol determination random value, normal symbol variation) acquired when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13. It is a general figure determination information storage area in which a random value) is stored, and FIG. 13D is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit of the general figure determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 13A, the special figure determination information storage area stores the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14, and the first special figure determination information hold storage. The area, the second special figure judgment information reserved storage area for storing the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15, and the special figure judgment information during the variable display are stored. It is composed of a special figure execution storage area, and the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and the second special figure determination information reservation storage area are divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, respectively. There is.

The number of undetermined special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol determination information reserved storage area is the first special symbol reservation number (U1), and these undetermined numbers are determined. The number of hold icons corresponding to the special figure judgment information is displayed in the first hold icon display area 31a, and the number of undetermined special figure judgment information stored in the second special figure judgment information hold storage area is the second special symbol. The number of holds (U2) is set, and the number of hold icons corresponding to these undetermined special figure determination information is displayed in the second hold icon display area 31b, and the variation display (variation effect) stored in the special figure execution storage area is displayed. The variation icon corresponding to the special figure determination information being executed is displayed in the variation icon display area 31c.

As shown in FIG. 13B, each storage unit has a jackpot determination random value storage area for storing a jackpot determination random value, and a special symbol determination random value for storing a special symbol determination random value. It is divided into a numerical storage area, a reach determination random value storage area for storing the reach determination random value, and a special figure variation random value storage area for storing the special figure variation random value.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 14 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number that is not stored. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 15 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number that is not stored.

In the special figure execution storage area, when the start condition of the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the first special figure determination information is shifted. Referenced to perform variable display of symbols. Further, when the start condition of the variation display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Referenced to perform.

As shown in FIG. 13 (c), the normal figure determination information storage area includes a normal figure determination information holding storage area in which the normal figure determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is stored. It is composed of a normal map execution storage area in which the normal map determination information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the normal map determination information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit. The number of undetermined normal figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal symbol determination information reservation storage area is the normal symbol reservation number (G).

As shown in FIG. 13D, each storage unit has a hit determination random value storage area for storing a hit determination random value and a normal symbol determination random value for storing a normal symbol determination random value. It is divided into a numerical storage area and a random value storage area for normal map fluctuation for storing random values for normal map fluctuation. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 and the normal map determination information is acquired, the normal symbol determination information is not stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal symbol determination information reservation storage area. The acquired normal map determination information is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number.

When the start condition for the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol execution storage area shifts the normal symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the normal symbol determination information reservation storage area, and displays the normal symbol variation display. Referenced to perform.

Next, the progress of the game in the game machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the main control board 110.

When power is supplied from the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the initialization process configured by steps S1 to S15. Specifically, the main CPU 110a permits access to the main RAM 110c in step S1.

In step S2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the backup flag indicating that the power is restored is set in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is set, the process is transferred to step S3, and if the backup flag is not set, the process is transferred to step S12.

The main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S3, and in step S4, compares the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c at the time of the previous power failure with the newly calculated checksum, and the checksum is calculated. Judge whether it is normal or not. If the checksum is normal, the process is moved to step S6, and if the checksum is not normal, it is assumed that the data stored in the RAM 110c is abnormal (the control state before the power is turned off cannot be restored normally). , The process is transferred to step S12.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 111a is ON. If the RAM clear switch 111a is not ON, the process is moved to step S7 to perform the process at the time of power restoration, and if the RAM clear switch 111a is ON, the process is to be performed at the time of power-on. The process is transferred to S13.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a clears the backup flag and checksum stored in the main RAM 110c, and sets the RAM at the time of power restoration. By performing this process, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power was turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a makes initial settings for devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 120, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a sets a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and performs processing in step S20. Move. As a result, the power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the power restoration notification.

The power restoration notification includes displaying a power restoration screen (image) indicating that the power has been restored on the image display device 31, and outputting a power restoration notification sound indicating that the power has been restored from the audio output device 32. It is to do.

It should be noted that the power recovery designation command may not include the information indicating the current gaming state, and the game state designation command indicating the current gaming status may be transmitted before or after the power recovery designation command is transmitted.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol storage designation command indicating the first special symbol hold number (U1) and the second special symbol hold number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, the effect control board 120 can grasp the number of special symbol reservations, and the image display device 31 has a first hold icon or a second hold icon. Will be processed to display.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol storage designation command indicating the normal symbol hold number (G) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 can grasp the number of normal symbol storages.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a clears all the areas of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM at the time of turning on the power, and shifts the process to step S14.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM at the time of turning on the power, and shifts the process to step S14. By performing this process, the progress state (control state) of the game is initialized to the initial state.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a makes initial settings for devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 120, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sets a power-on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized (RAM cleared) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S20. As a result, the power-on designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the power-on notification.

The power-on notification is a RAM clear notification that displays a power-on screen (image) indicating that the power is turned on to the image display device 31 or that the main RAM 110c is initialized from the voice output device 32. It is to output sound.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol variation random value, and in step S30, the jackpot determination The initial random value, the initial random value for determining a special symbol, the initial random value for collision detection, and the initial random value for determining a normal symbol are updated.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection signal is input from the power failure detection circuit provided on the power supply board 140. If a power outage occurs, the process is moved to step S32, and if a power outage does not occur, the process is moved to step S20 so that the process loops.

The main CPU 110a prohibits timer interruption in step S32, clears the output port in step S33, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S34, sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S36, the backup flag to be referred to when recovering from the power failure is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, access to the main RAM 110c is prohibited, and the process waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

When the power is turned off and when the power is turned on, the checksums of all used areas of the main RAM 110c are calculated and compared, but all areas including unused areas are checked. The sums may be calculated and compared.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process on the main control board 110.

The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds), so that the timer interrupt process described below is executed.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 110a into the stack area.

The main CPU 110a performs the time control process in step S110. Specifically, the update process of the special symbol time counter, the update process of the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, the update process of the normal symbol time counter, the update process of the opening / closing time of the startable movable piece 15b, etc. Performs a process of updating (subtracting 1) various timer counters.

The main CPU 110a performs a random number update process in step S120. Specifically, the process of updating the jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the hit determination random value, the normal symbol determination random value, and the normal symbol variation random value is performed. More specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by 1. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number value at that time. ..

The main CPU 110a performs the initial random number value update process in step S130. Specifically, the process of updating (adding 1) the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the input control process in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 12a, the first winning opening detection switch 16a, the second winning opening detection switch 17a, the first starting opening detection switch 14a, the second starting opening detection switch 15a, and the gate detection switch 13a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the various switches of, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs the special figure special electric control process. Specifically, a process of controlling a big hit lottery, a variable display of a special symbol, opening / closing of the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17, a change in the gaming state, and the like is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs the normal drawing control processing. Specifically, processing is performed to control a winning lottery, a variable display of a normal symbol, opening / closing of a startable movable piece 15b, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs the payout control process in step S500. Specifically, each prize ball counter is referred to, a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning opening is generated, and a process of setting the payout number designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c is performed. As a result, the payout number designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 130, and a process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the payout number designation command from the payout device is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the game progress data creation process in step S600. Specifically, the external information signal output from the game information output terminal plate 30, the drive data of the start opening opening / closing solenoid 15c, the driving data of the first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, and the driving data of the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c. , 1st special symbol display device 20, display data of 2nd special symbol display device 21, display data of normal symbol display device 22, display data of 1st special symbol hold indicator 23, 2nd special symbol hold display A process of creating output data related to the progress of the game, such as display data of the device 24 and display data of the normal symbol hold display 25, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process in step S700. Specifically, the process of outputting the external information signal, various drive data, and various display data created in step S600 and step S660 is performed. In addition, processing for transmitting commands set in the effect transmission data storage area and the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 120 and the payout control board 130 is also performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a, and when the detection signal is input, a process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter for the general winning opening is performed.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first large winning opening detection switch 16a or the second large winning opening detection switch 17a, and when the detection signal is input, it is used for the large winning opening. The process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 14a, and when the detection signal is input, 1 is added to the prize ball counter for the first start port, and the first special If the number of symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is added by 1, and special symbol determination information is acquired to obtain a predetermined storage unit (first) of the special symbol determination information storage area. Processing is performed when the data is stored in the storage unit to the fourth storage unit). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 15a is input, and when the detection signal is input, 1 is added to the prize ball counter for the second start port, and the second If the number of special symbol reservations (U2) is less than 4, the second number of special symbol reservations (U2) is added by 1, and the special symbol determination information is acquired to obtain the special symbol determination information storage area. The process of storing in the storage unit to the fourth storage unit) is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs the gate detection switch input process and ends the current input control process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, and if the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4 when the detection signal is input, the normal symbol hold number (G) is set. In addition to adding 1, a process is performed in which the normal figure determination information is acquired and stored in a predetermined storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the normal figure determination information storage area.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 14a. If the detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and if the detection signal is not input, the first start port detection switch input process this time is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to and updating the prize ball counter (three prize ball counters) for the first starting port used for the prize ball.

In step S230-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4. If the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4, the process shifts to step S230-4, and if the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is not less than 4, the first start port detection switch this time. End the input process.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and stores it, and in step S230-5, special symbol storage indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1). The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and processing such as displaying the first hold icon on the image display device 31 can be performed.

In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires special figure determination information, searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and searches for vacant storage units. The special figure judgment information acquired in is stored in.

The main CPU 110a performs the pre-determination process in step S230-7. Specifically, referring to the pre-judgment table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 11, the type of the special symbol display device, the jackpot determination random value acquired this time, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and Performs processing to determine the planned fluctuation pattern based on the random value for special figure fluctuation.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a sets a start port winning designation command indicating a scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the pre-determination process of step S230-7 in the transmission data storage area for production of the main RAM 110c, and this time, the first 1 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

As a result, the start port winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and even before the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 this time is started (1 or). It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (expecting the execution of the jackpot game) to foretell that the jackpot game may be executed (over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols).

(Second start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The second start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a second start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the second start port detection switch 15a. If the detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S240-2, and if the detection signal is not input, the second start port detection switch input process this time is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to and updating the prize ball counter (one prize ball counter) for the second starting port used for the prize ball.

In step S240-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently in progress. If the auxiliary game is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S240-5, and if the auxiliary game is in progress, 1 is added to and updated in the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) in step S240-4.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is less than 4. If the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S240-6, and if the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is not less than 4, the second start port detection switch of this time is performed. End the input process.

In step S240-6, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second special symbol hold number (U2) and stores it, and in step S240-7, special symbol storage indicating the second special symbol hold number (U2). The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and processing such as displaying the second hold icon on the image display device 31 can be performed.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a acquires special figure determination information, searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the second special figure determination information storage area, and searches for vacant storage units. The special figure judgment information acquired in is stored in.

The main CPU 110a performs the pre-determination process in step S240-9. Specifically, referring to the pre-judgment table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 11, the type of the special symbol display device, the jackpot determination random value acquired this time, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and Performs processing to determine the planned fluctuation pattern based on the random value for special figure fluctuation.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets a start port winning designation command indicating a scheduled variation pattern determined in the pre-determination process of step S240-9 in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and this time, the first 2 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

As a result, the start opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and even before the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 15 this time is started (1 or). It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (expecting the execution of the jackpot game) to foretell that the jackpot game may be executed (over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols).

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data, and if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310), and the special figure special electric processing data = 1. If, the process is transferred to the special symbol variation processing (step S320), if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the processing is transferred to the special symbol stop processing (step S330), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, a big hit. The process is transferred to the game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process is transferred to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

This "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, so that the subroutines necessary for the progress of the game are appropriately processed. Become.

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs the special symbol memory determination process and ends the special symbol special electric control process this time. Specifically, a jackpot determination process, a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed, a fluctuation time determination process for determining a variation time of a special symbol, and the like are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs the special symbol variation processing, and ends the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed is performed, and if the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a process of shifting to the special symbol stop process of step S330 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process and ends the special symbol special electric control process this time. Specifically, the processing corresponding to the special symbols (big hit symbol, lost symbol) displayed as stopped is performed, and the time saving game count (J), the time saving game flag, the high probability game count (X), and the high probability game flag are set. Perform the setting process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game process and ends the special figure special electric control process this time. Specifically, a process for controlling a jackpot game is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game end process and ends the special figure special electric control process this time. Specifically, a process of determining a probabilistic gaming state of either a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state and determining a gaming state of either a time-saving gaming state or a non-time-saving gaming state is performed. .. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the fluctuation display of the special symbol is being displayed (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), the current special symbol memory determination process is finished, and if the fluctuation display of the special symbol is not being displayed (special symbol time counter = 0), step S310 Move the process to -2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is 1 or more. If the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-3, and if the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-4. ..

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the second special symbol hold number (U2) to update, and shifts the process to step S310-6.

In step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-5, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S318-1. Move the process.

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the first special symbol hold number (U1) to update the main CPU 110a, and shifts the process to step S310-6.

In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a determines the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination information reservation storage area corresponding to the number of special symbol reservations (U) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. Information shift (storage area shift) is performed. Specifically, each special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information storage area or the second special figure determination information storage area from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is stored immediately before. Shift to the department. Here, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the special figure execution storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the special figure determination information used in the previous variation display of the special symbol already written in the special figure execution storage area (0th storage unit) is deleted.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is subtracted in preference to the first special symbol reservation number (U1), but the first special symbol is in the order in which the starting port is won. The number of reserved symbols (U1) and the number of reserved second special symbols (U2) may be subtracted, or the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) may be subtracted in preference to the number of reserved second special symbols (U2). You may try to do it.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a indicates the first special symbol hold number (U1) or the second special symbol hold number (U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. The symbol memory designation command is determined, and the determined special symbol memory designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, a special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 to reduce the number of the first hold icon or the second hold icon displayed on the image display device 31, or to reduce the number of the first hold icon or the first hold icon, or. A process of changing the second hold icon to the variable icon will be performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process in step S311. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 5, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the probability game state and the jackpot determination random value stored in the special figure execution storage area. With reference to the special symbol determination table shown in 6, the special symbol type (stop) based on the special symbol display device (type of start port) and the special symbol determination random value stored in the special symbol execution storage area. Special figure data) is determined. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure variation pattern determination process. Specifically, referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol display device (type of starting port), the result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol, the number of special symbol reservations (U), and the special symbol execution. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value stored in the storage area and the special symbol fluctuation random value.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs processing for executing the variation effect according to the variation pattern so as to correspond to the variation display of the special symbol. ..

In step S314, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state at the start of the fluctuation, and sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped on the effect control board 120.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time (counter value) of the special symbol based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in S110.

In step S316, the main CPU 110a starts the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, the variable display data of the special symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, display data for variable display of the special symbol is created by the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. Then, the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 will perform variable display of the special symbol.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, prepares to move the process to the special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 22, and ends the special symbol memory determination process this time.

In step S318-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a customer waiting state flag indicating that the special symbol variation display or the jackpot game is not executed in the customer waiting state (standby state). If there is a customer waiting state flag, the special symbol memory determination process this time is ended, and if there is no customer waiting state flag, the process is moved to step S318-2.

In step S318-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag indicating that the customer is in the waiting state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S318-3, the customer waiting state indicating that the customer is in the waiting state. The specified command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect, and the special symbol storage determination process this time is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the customer waiting effect.

(Big hit judgment process of main control board)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process on the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S311-1 whether or not it is a big hit. Specifically, when the special figure determination information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the first special figure determination information reservation storage area, the jackpot lottery jackpot shown in FIG. 5A is shown. When the special figure judgment information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area with reference to the judgment table, the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5 (b) is performed. With reference to the jackpot determination table, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a "big hit" based on the jackpot determination random value stored in the special figure execution storage area. If it is a big hit, the process is transferred to step S311-2, and if it is not a big hit, the process is transferred to step S311-5.

The main CPU 110a performs the jackpot symbol determination process in step S311-2. Specifically, the type of jackpot special symbol to be stopped and displayed based on the special symbol determination random value stored in the special symbol execution storage area with reference to the special symbol determination table in the jackpot shown in FIG. 6 (b). Is determined, and the stop special symbol data corresponding to the determined type of jackpot special symbol is set in the stop special symbol data storage area.

The stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area is used for determining whether or not the special symbol is a "big hit symbol" in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 23, which will be described later, and the big hit game process of FIG. 24. It is also used to determine the operating mode of the big winning opening, and is also used to determine the game state after the big hit in the big hit game ending process of FIG.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol designation command for jackpots corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in step S311-2 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and it is possible to grasp the type of the jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data) that is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 120.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a determines the game state at the time of winning the big hit from the information set in the game state storage area (time saving game flag storage area, high probability game flag storage area), and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The game status information indicating the above is set in the game status buffer. Specifically, if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are not set, 00H is set, and if the time saving game flag is not set but the high probability game flag is set, 01H is set. If the time saving game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set, 02H is set, and if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set, 03H is set.

In this way, apart from the game state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area), it is decided to set the game state at the time of jackpot winning in the game state buffer because the game is played during the jackpot game. Since the high-probability game flag and the short-time game flag in the state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area) are reset, a new game state at the time of winning the big hit is newly performed after the big hit is completed. This is because the game state storage area cannot be referred to when determining the game state at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, by providing a game state buffer for storing game information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot separately from the game state storage area, the game information in the game state buffer can be referred to after the jackpot ends. Based on the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the game state after the end of the big hit (time-saving game state, number of time-saving games, etc.) can be newly set.

In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a performs a loss symbol determination process. Specifically, the type of lost special symbol to be stopped and displayed based on the special symbol determination random value stored in the special symbol execution storage area with reference to the special symbol determination table for loss shown in FIG. 6 (a). Is determined, and the stop special figure data corresponding to the determined type of lost special symbol is set in the stop special figure data storage area.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol designation command for loss corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in step S311-5 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and this time. The jackpot judgment process ends. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and it is possible to grasp the type of the loss special symbol (stop special symbol data) that is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 120.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process on the main control board 110.

In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the special symbol time counter has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing this time is ended, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S320-2.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a stops and displays the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, the variation display data set in step S316 is cleared, and the special symbol set in steps S311-2 and S311-5 is displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol. The stop display data for displaying the stop display on the display device 21 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21, and the player is notified of the jackpot determination result.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for terminating the variation effect.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) for displaying the stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is updated by subtracting 1 every 4 ms in S110.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets 2 in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the process to the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 23, and ends the special symbol variation process this time.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process on the main control board 110.

In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0?). When the symbol stop time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S330-2, and when the symbol stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop process this time is terminated.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game end determination process. Specifically, when the time saving game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, 1 is subtracted from the time saving game count (J) to update, and whether or not the new time saving game count (J) is "0". Is determined. As a result, when the number of time-saving games (J) is "0", the time-saving game flag is cleared and the process proceeds to step S330-3. On the other hand, if the time saving game flag is not set, or if the time saving game count (J) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S330-3 as it is.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs the high-probability game end determination process. Specifically, when the high-probability game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, 1 is subtracted from the high-probability game count (X) to update, and the new high-probability game count (X) is "0". Determine if it exists. As a result, when the number of high-probability games (X) is "0", the high-probability game flag is cleared and the process is moved to step S330-4. On the other hand, if the high-probability game flag is not set, or if the high-probability game count (X) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S330-4 as it is.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped on the effect control board 120.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop special figure data stored in the stop special figure data storage area is a jackpot symbol. If it is a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-7, and if it is not a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-6.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the process to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 20, and ends the special symbol stop process this time.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special figure special electric processing data, and prepares to move the processing to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG. 24.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a performs the normal game state transition process. Specifically, the high-probability game flag, the high-probability game count (X), the time-saving game flag, and the time-saving game number (J) are cleared to shift to the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state).

In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a performs the jackpot start preparation setting process. Specifically, the type of the jackpot game is determined based on the stop special figure data with reference to the special electric accessory operating mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, and the jackpot opening mode for the jackpot shown in FIG. 9 is determined. From the table group, the big winning opening opening mode determination table ("first big hit table", "second big hit table", "third big hit table", "fourth big hit table") is decided according to the type of big hit game.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command according to the type of jackpot game (first jackpot game to fourth jackpot game) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the opening effect of the jackpot game.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the jackpot game in the special game timer counter, and ends the special symbol stop process this time. Specifically, the opening time according to the type of the jackpot game is determined from the big winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9, and is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Big hit game processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the round game count (R) storage area. If it is in the opening, the process is transferred to step S340-2, and if it is not in the opening, the process is transferred to S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the opening time has not passed, the jackpot game process this time is ended, and if the opening time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-3.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a sets 1 to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs the large winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K), and the energization data for energizing the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is set, and the above With reference to the large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9, the first large winning opening 16 is based on the current number of round games (R) and opening number (K). Alternatively, the opening time of the second special winning opening 17 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first prize opening 16 or the second prize opening 17 will be opened.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a performs the round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, when the number of times of opening (K) is "1", that is, when the round game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of times of round game (R) is stored in the transmission data for production of the main RAM 110c. Set in the area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the round effect of the jackpot game.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently ending. The ending is the period after all the preset round games are completed. If the ending is in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-18, and if the ending is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-7.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening is closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is set. If the large winning opening is closed, the process is transferred to step S340-8, and if the large winning opening is not closed, the processing is transferred to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not passed, the jackpot game process this time is finished, and if the closing time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-4 in order to open the big winning opening.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition for ending the opening of the large winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the large winning opening winning ball counter (C) reaches the specified number (9 pieces) or the opening time per opening in the number of opening times (K) elapses. Determine if it holds. If it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-10, and if it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening closing process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is cleared, and the large winning opening opening mode determined in step S330-9 is determined. With reference to the table (see FIG. 9), the closing time of the first major winning opening 16 or the second major winning opening 17 (see the current number of round games (R) and opening number (K)). The closing interval time or one closing time) is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first prize opening 16 or the second prize opening 17 will be closed.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S340-11 whether or not one round has been completed. Specifically, whether or not the value of the large winning opening winning ball counter (C) reaches the specified number (9 pieces) and the number of opening times (K) becomes the maximum number of opening times is satisfied. Is determined. When one round is completed, the process is moved to step S340-12, and when one round is not completed, the current jackpot game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs the round data initialization process in step S340-12. Specifically, the number of times of opening (K) and the large winning opening winning ball counter (C) are cleared. However, the number of round games (R) is not cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of round games (R) is the maximum number of round games. If it is the maximum number of round games, the process is transferred to step S340-15, and if it is not the maximum number of round games, the process is transferred to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of round games (R) and stores the game, and ends the current jackpot game process.

The main CPU 110a clears the number of round games (R) in step S340-15, and in step S340-16, based on the large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9. , The type of special game (long hit game, short hit game, development hit game) is determined, and the ending designation command according to the type of big hit game is set in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the ending effect of the jackpot game.

In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time according to the type of jackpot game to the special game timer counter based on the big winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9. set.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. When the ending time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S340-19, and when the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is ended.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a sets 4 in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the big hit game end processing shown in FIG. 25, and ends the current big hit game processing.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game end process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game end process on the main control board 110.

In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area and the game state information in the game state buffer.

The main CPU 110a performs the high-probability game flag setting process in step S350-2. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, whether or not to shift to the high-probability gaming state at the end of the jackpot game based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information. In the case of shifting to the high-probability gaming state, a high-probability gaming flag indicating that the high-probability gaming state is set is set in the high-probability gaming flag storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is "01", the high probability game flag is set.

In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game number setting process. Specifically, it is the number of fluctuation displays that can be executed in the high-probability game state based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information with reference to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. The high-probability game count (X) is determined, and the determined high-probability game count (X) is set in the high-probability game count (X) storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is "01", 80 times is set as the high probability game number (X).

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the jackpot game end time setting data table shown in FIG. 7, whether or not to shift to the time saving game state at the end of the jackpot game is determined based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game information. When making a determination and shifting to the time-saving game state, a time-saving game flag indicating that the time-saving game state is set is set in the time-saving game flag storage area. For example, when the game status information is 01H, 02H, or 03H, the time saving game flag is set.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game number determination process. Specifically, referring to the jackpot game end time setting data table shown in FIG. 7, the time reduction is the number of fluctuation displays that can be executed in the time reduction game state based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information. The number of games (J) is determined, and the determined number of time-saving games (J) is set in the time-saving game number (J) storage area. For example, when the stop special figure data is "04" and the game status information is 00H, the time saving game count (J) is set to 0, and when the game status information is 01H, 02H, or 03H, the time saving game count ( Set 80 times in J).

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a confirms the presence / absence of the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag, specifies the game state, and sends a game state designation command indicating the specified game state to the transmission data storage area for production. set. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped by the effect control board 120.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 20, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

(Fundamental control processing of the main control board)
FIG. 26 will be described with reference to the normal drawing control processing of the main control board 110. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a normal drawing control process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the fuzu-fuden processing data, and if the fuzu-fuden processing data = 0, shifts the processing to the normal symbol variation processing (step S410), and the fuzu-fuden processing data. If = 1, the process is transferred to the auxiliary game process (step S420).

As will be described later, this "Fuzu Fuden processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the Fuzu Fuden control processing, so the subroutines necessary for the progress of the game are processed as appropriate. It will be.

In step S410, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol variation process and ends the current normal symbol control process. Specifically, a hit determination process, a process of displaying a normal symbol in a variable manner, a process of stopping and displaying a normal symbol, and the like are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

In step S420, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game process and ends the current Fuzu Fuden control process. Specifically, a process for controlling an auxiliary game is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

(Normal symbol variation processing of main control board)
The normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process on the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress. If the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress, the process is transferred to step S410-9, and if the variation display of the normal symbol is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol hold number (G) is 1 or more. If the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S410-3, and if the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the normal symbol hold number (G) to update, and shifts the process to step S410-4.

In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a shifts the normal symbol determination information stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. Specifically, each normal map determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the normal map determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the normal map execution storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the special figure determination information used in the previous variation display of the normal symbol, which has already been written in the normal figure execution storage area (0th storage unit), is deleted.

The main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process in step S410-5. Specifically, with reference to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 12 (a), it is determined whether or not there is a hit based on the game state and the hit determination random value stored in the normal figure execution storage area. ..

The main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol determination process in step S410-6. Specifically, with reference to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 12B, the stop display is based on the current time saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number value for determining the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol (stop normal figure data) to be used is determined, the determined stop normal figure data is set in the stop normal figure data storage area, and the normal figure designation command corresponding to the stop normal figure data is stored in the transmission data for production of the main RAM 110c. Set in the area. As a result, the normal map designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the stop normal map data can be grasped on the effect control board 120.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a performs the fluctuation time determination process of the normal symbol. Specifically, referring to the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 (c), it is normal based on the game state, the hit determination result, and the normal map fluctuation random value stored in the normal map execution storage area. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined and set in the normal symbol time counter, and the normal symbol fluctuation designation command corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol variation designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 can grasp the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a starts the variation display of the normal symbol and ends the current variation process of the normal symbol. Specifically, the variable display data of the normal symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, display data for variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 22 is created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700, so that the normal symbol display device 22 displays the normal symbol. The variable display will be performed.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the normal symbol time counter has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the normal symbol variation processing this time is terminated, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S410-10.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a stops the variable display of the normal symbol. Specifically, the main stop display data is for clearing the variation display data set in step S410-8 and causing the normal symbol display device 22 to stop and display the normal symbol set in step S410-6. It is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22, and the player is notified of the hit determination result.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop normal figure data set in the stop normal figure data storage area is a hit normal symbol. If it is a hit normal symbol, the process is moved to step S410-12, and if it is not a hit normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets the normal-figure general-purpose processing data = 1 and prepares to move the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG. 28, and in step S410-13, performs the opening mode determination processing. Specifically, referring to the start opening opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 12D, the maximum number of times the starting movable piece 15b is opened, the opening time of the auxiliary game, and the second starting opening 15 are based on the stop chart data. Determine the opening time, interval time, and ending time of the auxiliary game.

In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the auxiliary game in the auxiliary game timer counter, and ends the normal symbol variation process this time. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Auxiliary game processing of main control board)
The auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the auxiliary game processing on the main control board 110.

First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently being opened. If it is in the opening, the process is transferred to step S420-2, and if it is not in the opening, the process is transferred to S420-4.

In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. If the opening time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process this time is ended, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S420-3.

In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a performs the second start port opening process and ends the auxiliary game process this time. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (S), energization data for energizing the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c is set, and the second starting port 15 corresponding to the number of times of opening (S) is opened. Set the time to the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second starting port 15 is opened.

In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently ending. If it is ending, the process is transferred to step S420-12, and if it is not ending, the process is transferred to step S420-5.

In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting port 15 is closed (interval). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c is set. If the second starting port 15 is closed, the process is transferred to step S420-6, and if the second starting port 15 is not closed, the process is transferred to step S420-7.

In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time (interval time) of the second starting port 15 set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the auxiliary process this time is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S420-3 in order to open the second starting port 15.

In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition for ending the opening of the second starting port 15 is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) reaches the specified number (10 pieces) or the opening time per opening in the number of opening times (S) elapses. Is determined whether or not is satisfied. If it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S420-8, and if it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied, the auxiliary game process this time is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs the second start port closing process in step S420-8. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c is cleared, and the closing time of the second start port 15 determined in step S410-13 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second starting port 15 is closed.

In step S420-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game ends. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times (S) of opening the second starting port is the maximum number of times of opening. When ending the auxiliary game, the process is moved to step S420-10, and when the auxiliary game is not ended, the current auxiliary game process is ended.

In step S420-10, the main CPU 110a performs the auxiliary game end process. Specifically, the number of times of opening (S) and the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) are cleared.

In step S420-11, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time determined in step S410-13 in the auxiliary game timer counter.

In step S420-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. If the ending time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S420-13, and if the ending time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process this time is ended.

In step S420-13, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the normal symbol processing data, prepares to move the processing to the normal symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 27, and ends the auxiliary game processing this time.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
The process executed by the sub CPU 120a in the effect control unit 120 m will be described. First, the main process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the effect control unit 120 m.

First, the sub CPU 120a performs the initialization process in step S1000. In this process, the sub CPU 120a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 120b and initializes and sets the flags stored in the sub RAM 120c in response to the power being turned on.

The sub CPU 120a performs the sub random number update process in step S1100. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process of step S1100 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 120 m. Although not shown, the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 120 m generates a clock pulse at predetermined intervals (2 milliseconds), reads the timer interrupt processing program, and reads the effect control board. Timer interrupt processing is executed.

In step S1300, the sub CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 120a into the stack area.

In step S1400, the sub CPU 120a performs a command analysis process. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

When the effect control unit 120m receives a command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process of the effect control unit 120m (not shown) occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. It has become.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 120a performs a timer update process for updating various timer counters used by the effect control unit 120m.

In step S1700, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the signals of the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross key detection switch 36b are input via the frame control board 180, and inputs the signals of the effect button detection switch 35a and the like. If so, an effect input control process for transmitting an effect button signal or the like to the image control unit 150 is performed.

In step S1800, the sub CPU 120a performs a data output process of transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c to the frame control board 180 and the image control unit 150.

In step S1900, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in step S1300 to the register of the sub CPU 120a.

(Command analysis processing of the production control unit)
Next, the command analysis process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process (1) in the effect control unit 120 m, and FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process (2) in the effect control unit 120 m. The command analysis process (2) is performed following the command analysis process (1).

In step S1401, the sub CPU 120a refers to the reception buffer and determines whether or not a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process is moved to step S1410, and if no command has been received, the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step S1411, and if it is not a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step S1420.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 120a performs the hold storage update process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, the reserved memory number is analyzed from the received special symbol storage designation command, and the analyzed reserved memory number is set in the reserved memory number counter of the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1420, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the start opening winning designation command. If it is a start opening prize designation command, the process is transferred to step S1421, and if it is not a start opening prize designation command, the process is transferred to step S1430.

In step S1421, the sub CPU 120a performs the icon change effect determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, based on the content of the received start opening winning designation command, processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the change scenario. The details of this icon change effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In addition, the icon change effect is to change the display mode of the icon (hold icon, the variable icon) displayed on the image display device 31, and the jackpot game is executed over one or a plurality of variable effects. It is one of the look-ahead effects that suggests that there is a possibility that the jackpot game will be executed.

In step S1430, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol designation command. If it is an effect symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step S1431, and if it is not an effect symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step S1440.

In step S1431, the sub CPU 120a performs the basic symbol data determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, for determining the basic symbol data (1st to 4th jackpot symbol data, lost symbol data) that makes it possible to identify the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the content of the received effect symbol designation command. Perform processing.

In step S1440, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If it is a variation pattern specification command, the process is transferred to step S1441, and if it is not a variation pattern specification command, the process is transferred to step S1450.

In step S1441, the sub CPU 120a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, based on the content of the received variation pattern specification command, the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect executed by using various effect devices, is determined, and the variation effect pattern is determined according to the determined variation effect pattern. A process of setting the variation effect pattern command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the variation effect pattern command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the variation effect is performed. The details of this variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

The sub CPU 120a performs the icon display mode update process in step S1442. Specifically, the hold icon displayed on the image display device 31 and the display mode of the variable icon are updated based on the change scenario determined by the icon change effect determination process described above and the determined variable effect pattern. Then, the process for executing the icon change effect is performed.

In step S1443, the sub CPU 120a performs a jackpot notice effect determination process. Specifically, based on the determined variable effect pattern, processing is performed to determine the presence / absence of the jackpot advance notice effect and the type of the jackpot advance notice effect to be executed. The details of the jackpot notice effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

The jackpot notice effect is an effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed as a result of the variable effect being executed (the jackpot game is expected to be executed).

In step S1444, the sub CPU 120a performs a stock advance notice effect determination process. Specifically, based on the determined variable effect pattern, processing is performed to determine the presence or absence of the stock advance notice effect, the type of stock advance notice effect to be executed (according to the game state), and the like. The details of this stock notice effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

The stock notice production is the following production.
-In the variation effect of 1 (for example, the first half), one or a plurality of icons shown in FIG. 66 and the like described later are acquired.
-In the variation effect of 1 that acquired the above icon (for example, the latter half), the acquired one or more icons are released (if multiple are acquired, they are released one by one), and the icons released during the variation effect. It is an effect of generating a predetermined event (movement of the first decorative member 33a (effecting object), effect of changing the variable icon, promotion of operation of the effect button 35, etc.) according to the above.
In the first stock production (see FIGS. 67 to 69) described later, as an example,
(B) The acquisition and release of icons are described in a pattern that is performed within one variable effect.
In the second stock production (see FIGS. 73 and 74) described later, as an example,
(B) The pattern is described in which the icon is acquired by multiple fluctuations and the icon is released by a single fluctuation.
Not limited to these
(C) A pattern in which icons are acquired in multiple fluctuations and icons are released in multiple fluctuations (d) A pattern in which icons are acquired in singular fluctuations and icons are released in multiple fluctuations may be provided.
In addition, the pattern to be executed for each stock effect may be appropriately selected. For example, the above (a) to (2) may be executed for both the first stock effect and the second stock effect, or the patterns to be executed may be different between the first stock effect and the second stock effect. .. For example, the above (b) and (c) may be executed in the first stock effect, and the above (a) and (d) may be executed in the second stock effect.
In addition, when performing with a plurality of fluctuations, it can be realized by using the preliminary determination table of FIG.
Further details of the stock notice production will be described in FIG. 66 and after.

In the following, the icon shown in FIG. 66 and the like in the stock notice production is simply described as an "icon", the addition of the "icon" is described as "acquisition", and the "icon" is used. Described as "release".
Further, the "stock notice production" may be simply described as "stock production", or the first stock production, the second stock production, and the third stock production may be collectively described as "stock production".

In step S1445, the sub CPU 120a performs a timer effect determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, processing is performed to determine whether or not the timer effect is executed and the mode of the timer effect to be executed, based on the presence or absence of the icon change effect, the determined variation effect pattern, and the like. The details of this timer effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

The timer effect is a predetermined event (icon change effect, various reach effects, zone effect, effect button) during the fluctuation effect by performing a countdown display (subtraction display) of the numerical value (timer) displayed on the image display device 31. It is an effect that suggests that the operation validity period of 35, the stop display of the jackpot symbol, etc.) occurs, and the timing when a predetermined event occurs. In addition, the countdown display (subtraction display) in the timer effect is updated at substantially the same interval as the actual time counting.
The timer effect is not limited to the countdown display of numerical values (timers), for example, by displaying an image imitating a meter and displaying such that the meter is decremented, the timing at which a predetermined event occurs can be determined. It may be suggested, or an image imitating an hourglass may be displayed to indicate that the sand in the hourglass moves from one side to the other to suggest the timing at which a predetermined event occurs. An image imitating a bomb may be displayed to indicate that the bomb explodes after a lapse of a predetermined period, thereby suggesting the timing at which a predetermined event occurs. That is, not only the number of seconds display but also the period display may indicate the timing at which a predetermined event occurs.

In step S1450, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol determination command. If it is a symbol confirmation command, the process is transferred to step S1451, and if it is not a symbol confirmation command, the process is transferred to step S1460.

In step S1451, the sub CPU 120a performs the effect symbol stop processing and ends the command analysis processing this time. Specifically, in order to stop and display the effect symbol 38, a process of setting a stop designation command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the stop designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for stopping and displaying the variation effect is performed.

In step S1460, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. If it is a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step S1461, and if it is not a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step S1470.

In step S1461, the sub CPU 120a performs the game state setting process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, the current game state is specified with reference to the received game state designation command, and data indicating the specified game state is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1470, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is the opening designation command. If it is an opening designation command, the process is moved to step S1471, and if it is not an opening designation command, the process is moved to step S1480.

In step S1471, the sub CPU 120a performs the opening effect pattern determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, based on the opening designation command, the effect pattern of the opening effect to be performed at the start of the jackpot game is determined, and the opening effect specification command corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Do. As a result, the opening effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the opening effect is performed.

In step S1480, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command. If it is a round designation command, the process is transferred to step S1481, and if there is no round designation command, the process is transferred to step S1490.

In step S1481, the sub CPU 120a performs the round effect pattern determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, based on the round designation command, the effect pattern of the round effect to be performed during the round game is determined, and the round effect specification command corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. .. As a result, the round effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the round effect is performed.

In step S1490, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is the ending designation command. If it is an ending designation command, the process is moved to step S1491, and if it is not an ending designation command, the current command analysis process is terminated.

In step S1491, the sub CPU 120a performs the jackpot end effect pattern determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, based on the ending designation command, the effect pattern of the ending effect to be performed at the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the ending specification command corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. .. As a result, the ending effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

(Icon change production decision processing)
Next, the icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the received start opening winning designation command in step S1421-1. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the received start opening winning designation command, and grasps the winning / winning of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, and the effect content (planned fluctuation pattern).

In step S1421-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is determined that the icon change effect is feasible period, the process is moved to step S1421-3, and if it is determined that the icon change effect is not the feasible period, the current icon change effect determination process is terminated.

In addition, in the judgment of whether or not the icon change effect is feasible, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted, the jackpot game is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not being executed. If it is determined that it is an executable period. It should be noted that one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided.

In step S1421-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the hold storage corresponding to the previously received start opening winning designation command, that is, the pre-determination results of the advance hold are all equal to or less than the normal reach. If all are below the normal reach, the process is transferred to step S1421-4, and if all are not below the normal reach, the process is transferred to step 1421-7.
In addition, the term "normal reach or less" means normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, and normal reach. That is, in this step S1421-3, it is determined whether or not all the prior determination results of the advance hold are normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach.

In step S1421-4, the sub CPU 120a acquires an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 31, and in step S1421-5, the sub CPU 120a acquires the final display mode of the icon. Select the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 34) for determining. Details of this icon final display mode determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

The sub CPU 120a determines the icon final display mode in step S1421-6. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the icon final display mode determination table, and is one of a plurality of icon final display modes based on the start opening winning designation command and the icon display mode determination random value. The final display mode of the two icons is determined.

In step S1421-7, the sub CPU 120a determines a normal icon, which is a normal display mode, as the final icon display mode when the icon change effect is not executed.

In step S1421-8, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined icon final display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. When the icon final display mode is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process is moved to step S1421-9, and when the icon final display mode is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process is performed in step S1421-11. To move.

In step S1421-9, the sub CPU 120a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 35) for determining a scenario for icon change effect. Details of this change scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

In step S1421-10, the sub CPU 120a determines a change scenario, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 120c, and shifts the process to step S1421-12. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the change scenario determination table, and is based on the icon final display mode, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the start opening winning designation command, and the selection rate. Determine one change scenario from the change scenarios.

In step S1421-11, the sub CPU 120a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 120c, and shifts the process to step S1421-12.

The sub CPU 120a specifies an initial display mode when the icon is first displayed on the image display device 31 from the determined change scenario or the non-change scenario in step S1421-12, and the icon corresponding to the initial display mode. The initial display mode command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and the icon change effect determination process this time is completed. As a result, the icon initial display mode command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon initial display mode command is displayed on the image display device 31, and a predetermined sound effect is produced. It will be output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the variable icon change effect) is executed when all the preliminary determination results of the advance hold are equal to or less than the normal reach. , The icon change effect may be executed when the pre-determination result of the advance hold does not perform the reach effect, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the reach effect is performed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon is held during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. The display mode of the above is changed, the reach effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, even if the pre-judgment result of the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but in such a case, the pre-determination result of the advance hold is reach. The icon change effect may be more easily executed (executed at a higher rate) when the effect is not included than when the reach effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode. The icon final display mode determination table is associated with the type of the start opening winning designation command, the distribution ratio (%) for each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be determined.

In the final display mode of the icon, a white icon that is displayed in white as a normal icon and a special icon that suggests that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit (a big hit game is executed) by executing the icon change effect. Blue icon displayed in blue, green icon displayed in green, red icon displayed in red, zebra icon displayed in zebra pattern (color), and rainbow icon displayed in rainbow color are set. The jackpot expectation for the special icon is higher in the order of (white icon <) blue icon <green icon <red icon <zebra icon <rainbow icon, and it is confirmed that the rainbow icon will be a jackpot. It is an icon.

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is different depending on the effect content. The start winning information (starting opening winning designation command) includes information on the winning of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, and the content of the effect (reach effect, pseudo-repeated number of times).

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the effect content is specific start winning information indicating that the effect content is SP reach or SPSP reach, it indicates that the effect content is a normal variation, a shortened variation, or a normal reach that does not reach the reach. Special icons are selected at a higher rate than in the case of normal start winning information.

Further, as a second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34, the selection rate of the icon final display mode is different depending on the number of pseudo-reams. Specifically, the special icon with a high expectation of big hit is selected at a higher rate when the number of pseudo-reams is 1 than when the number of pseudo-reams is 0. In the case of 2 times, the special icon with high expectation of big hit is selected at a higher rate, and in the case of 3 times of pseudo-ream, the rainbow icon with confirmed big hit is selected. It has become like.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario. The change scenario determination table is associated with the final display mode of the icon, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the start opening winning designation command, the distribution ratio (%) for each scenario, and the type of change scenario to be determined. For reference, the preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and the update mode in the fluctuations are described.

Here, the "preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command. That is, the "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the change icon change effect is executed). ) Scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the display mode of the icon change during the execution of the pre-variation (hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the variation icon change). The scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) in which the effect is not executed, and the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the change (the hold icon change effect and the change icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 12 or the like) to be executed is set.

As an example of the change scenario, a case where the change scenario 39 is selected in response to the reception of the start port prize designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14 will be described.

In the change scenario 39, when the game ball is won in the first starting port 14, a white icon is displayed as a hold icon at a position corresponding to the hold number “4” in the first hold icon display area 31a of the image display device 31. Is displayed. Then, the white icon is maintained until the pre-variation before the four changes that are being executed at the time of displaying the white icon is completed. After that, when the pre-variation before 3 fluctuations is started, the white icon moves to the position corresponding to the number of holds "3", the hold icon change effect is executed, and the white icon changes to a blue icon. Then, when the pre-variation before the two fluctuations is started, the blue icon moves to the position corresponding to the reserved number "2", and the blue icon is maintained until the pre-variation before the two fluctuations ends. After that, when the pre-variation before one change is started, the blue icon moves to the position corresponding to the hold number "1", the hold icon change effect is executed, and the blue icon changes to the green icon. Then, when the change is started, the green icon becomes the change icon, the change icon change effect is executed, the green icon changes to a red icon at a predetermined timing, and then changes to a zebra icon at a predetermined timing. To do.
In addition, in the change when changing to a blue icon, a green icon, a red icon, and a zebra icon as the final icon display mode, the display mode is changed step by step, but the rainbow icon is the final icon display mode. A pattern that changes in two steps (red → rainbow) may be provided as in the case of the change to, or a pattern that changes in three steps (for example, a change from a blue icon to a zebra icon) may be provided.

As the first feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 35, the scenario in which the icon display mode changes during the execution of the change is more than the scenario in which the icon display mode changes when the game ball is won at the starting port. Is being selected at a high rate. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the expectation of whether or not the icon display mode changes (whether the icon change effect is executed) until the change, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, as a second feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 35, when the icon display mode changes over a plurality of stages (green, red, and zebra icons are determined as the icon final display mode). It is set so that the number of steps in which the icon changes during the execution of the change is likely to be larger than the number of steps in which the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the expectation that the display mode of the icon changes in a plurality of stages in the fluctuation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the reach effect (which may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in the prior variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by the change scenario determination table using whether or not the reach effect suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed in the advance fluctuation is executed as a judgment factor. You may decide the scenario. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the reach effect is not executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, the icon display mode changes during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is higher than that during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which is not executed.

(Variable effect pattern determination process)
Next, the variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

The sub CPU 120a refers to the received variation pattern designation command in step S1441-1 and selects the variation effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 37 and 38) in step S1441-2.

In step S1441-3, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determination table and determines one variation effect pattern from the plurality of variation effect patterns based on the variation pattern designation command and the distribution ratio (%). .. Details of this variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

In step S1441-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the variation effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current variation effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variation effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the variation effect is performed.

(Variable production pattern determination table)
37 and 38 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the variation effect pattern. The variation effect pattern determination table is associated with the variation effect pattern specification command, the distribution ratio (%) for each variation effect pattern, and the determined variation effect pattern, and the effect configuration for each variation effect pattern is used as a reference. Is described.
Note that FIG. 37 is a table to be referred to in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, and FIG. 38 is a table to be referred to in the high-probability time-saving game state.

The variation effect pattern is an variation performed by using the effect devices of the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the panel drive device 33, the panel lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, the effect button 35, and the cross key 36. It is a production mode of the production, and the presence / absence of a pseudo continuous notice, the presence / absence of a reach production, the content of the reach production, and the like are defined.

Here, each term described in the effect configuration of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 will be described.

The “normal variation” indicates that a normal variation effect in which a reach state is not formed by the effect symbol 38 is performed.
The “shortening variation” indicates that the shortening variation effect is performed in which the reach state is not formed by the effect symbol 38, which is shorter than the normal variation effect.
The "normal reach" indicates that a normal reach effect is performed in which a reach state is formed by the effect symbol 38.
The “SP reach” indicates that the reach state is formed by the effect symbol 38, and the SP reach effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect is performed.
The "SPSP reach" indicates that the reach state is formed by the effect symbol 38, and the SPSP reach effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the SP reach effect is performed.

The "pseudo-continuous failure" indicates that a fanning effect of whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice is executed is executed, but the result is that the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed in the end.
The "pseudo-continuous success" indicates that a fanning effect of whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice is executed is executed, and finally the pseudo-continuous notice is executed.

"Button non-collision" means that an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 35 is executed in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding reach effect, and whether the effect button 35 is operated in this operation promotion effect or the effect button 35 When the operation valid period elapses, a winning notification effect for notifying whether or not it is a big hit is executed, but during the operation valid period in this operation promotion effect, the effect button 35 does not move upward and is in a non-protruding state (normal state). It shows that it is maintained in.
“Button thrust” means that an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 35 is executed in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding reach effect, and whether the effect button 35 is operated or the effect button 35 is operated in this operation promotion effect. When the valid period elapses, a winning notification effect for notifying whether or not it is a big hit is executed, but the effect button 35 moves upward during the operation valid period in this operation promotion effect and becomes a protruding state (special state). Is shown.

The "roulette effect" means that the image display device 31 displays a plurality of development destination icons indicating the development destination (for example, loss, SP reach, heat zone, etc.), and one development destination icon from the plurality of development destination icons is displayed. Is selected to indicate that a roulette effect is performed to move to the development destination indicated by the selected development destination icon.
The "zone effect" is to perform a specific effect (background display) different from the normal effect (background) on the image display device 31 and foretell that the jackpot game may be executed (the jackpot game is executed). It shows that the zone production will be performed.
The "heat zone effect" is to perform a specific effect (background display) different from the normal zone effect, and foretell that the possibility that the jackpot game will be executed is higher than the normal zone effect (the jackpot game is executed). It shows that the heat zone production is performed.
The "next notice" indicates that the next notice effect is performed to announce the type of reach effect (SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect in this embodiment) that is finally performed in the variable effect.

“Tempai effect failure” means that in a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 55) in which the reach effect is not executed, the player is made to operate the effect button 35 once or multiple times to form a reach state. As a result, it is shown that the reach state is not formed.
"Successful tempai effect" means that in a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 57) that executes a reach effect, a player is made to operate the effect button 35 once or multiple times to form a reach state. As a result, it is shown that a reach state is formed.
In the following, "tempai production failure" and "tempai production success" may be collectively referred to as "tempai production".
The "decision effect 2 failure" means that the player is given an effect button in the variable effect pattern for executing SP reach (for example, variable effect pattern 58) or the variable effect pattern for executing SPSP reach (for example, variable effect pattern 66). As a result of operating 35 once or a plurality of times, it is shown that the first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) does not move (fall) downward.
The "decision effect 2 success" means that the player is given an effect button in the variable effect pattern for executing SP reach (for example, variable effect pattern 81) or the variable effect pattern for executing SPSP reach (for example, variable effect pattern 89). As a result of operating 35 once or a plurality of times, it is shown that the first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) moves (falls) downward.
In the following, "decision effect 2 failure" and "decision effect 2 success" may be collectively referred to as "decision effect 2".

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is that the reach effect is more likely to be executed when the pseudo continuous notice effect is executed than when the pseudo continuous notice effect is not executed. The higher the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous notice, the higher the expectation of a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation regarding whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice is executed or the number of times the pseudo-continuous notice is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is that the effect button 35 remains in the normal state during the operation valid period that occurs in the final phase (final stage) of the reach effect. There is a point that the jackpot expectation is higher when the effect button 35 is in a special state than. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the effect button 35 is in a special state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a third feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the final phase of the reach effect is more when the thermal zone effect is executed than when only the normal zone effect is executed. There is a point that the effect button 35 tends to be in a special state during the operation valid period that occurs in the (final stage). By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to which type of zone effect is to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is that the execution of the SPSP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect is confirmed when the next notice effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the next notice production will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is not provided with the variation effect pattern in which the normal reach is performed and the SP SP reach is performed after the SP reach is performed, but it may be provided. ..

(Big hit notice production decision processing)
Next, the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a jackpot notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determined in step S1343-1, and in step S1443-2, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-reach advance notice effect using the pre-reach advance notice determination table (see FIG. 40). And determine the notice pattern that defines the type of pre-reach notice effect to be executed. Details of this pre-reach notice determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-3 whether or not the determined advance notice pattern is a advance notice pattern for executing the dialogue advance notice effect. If it is a notice pattern that executes the dialogue notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-4, and if it is a notice pattern that does not execute the dialogue notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-6.

The dialogue advance notice effect is a jackpot advance notice effect in which the image display device 31 displays a dialogue suggesting a jackpot expectation level based on the operation of the effect button 35, and the voice corresponding to the dialogue is output from the voice output device 32. It is one of the types.

In step S1443-4, the sub CPU 120a determines a serif pattern, which is an effect mode of the serif notice effect, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c by using the serif pattern determination table (see FIG. 41 (a)). Details of this dialogue pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 41 (a).

In step S1443-5, the sub CPU 120a sets the dialogue advance notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined dialogue pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the dialogue advance notice effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the dialogue advance notice effect is performed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-6 whether or not the determined advance notice pattern is a advance notice pattern for executing the step-up advance notice effect (SU advance notice effect). If it is a notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-7, and if it is not a notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-9.

In addition, the step-up notice effect is determined from the first step to any one of a plurality of steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage) according to the jackpot expectation. It is a kind of jackpot notice production that executes step production in order. Specifically, it is easier to execute more step effects when the jackpot game is executed (higher expectation of the jackpot) than when the jackpot game is not executed.

In step S1443-7, the sub CPU 120a determines a step-up pattern, which is an effect mode of the step-up notice effect, by using the step-up pattern determination table (see FIG. 41 (b)), and puts it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set. Details of this step-up pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 41 (b).

In step S1443-8, the sub CPU 120a sets the step-up notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined step-up pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, the step-up notice effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the step-up notice effect is performed.

In step S1443-9, the sub CPU 120a uses the in-reach advance notice determination table (see FIG. 42 (a)) to determine whether or not the in-reach advance notice effect is executed and the type of the in-reach advance notice effect to be executed. To determine. The details of the notice determination table during reach will be described later with reference to FIG. 42 (a).

In step S1443-10, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined advance notice pattern is a advance notice pattern for executing the character group advance notice effect. If it is a notice pattern that executes the character group notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-11, and if it is a notice pattern that does not execute the character group notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-13.

The character group notice effect is a type of jackpot advance notice effect in which one of a plurality of types of characters having different jackpot expectations is displayed as a group on the image display device 31.

In step S1443-11, the sub CPU 120a determines the character group pattern, which is the production mode of the character group notice effect, by using the character group pattern determination table (see FIG. 42B), and sets the character group pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set. Details of this character group pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 42 (b).

In step S1443-12, the sub CPU 120a sets the character group advance notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined character group pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the character group advance notice effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the character group advance notice effect is executed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-13 whether or not the determined advance notice pattern is a advance notice pattern for executing the title advance notice effect. If it is a notice pattern that executes the title notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-14, and if it is a notice pattern that does not execute the title notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-16.

The title notice effect is a color of the title (reach title in SP reach or SPSP reach) displayed on the image display device 31 when SP reach or SPSP reach is executed, in a color according to the jackpot expectation. It is one of the jackpot notice effects to be displayed.

In step S1443-14, the sub CPU 120a determines a title pattern, which is an effect mode of the title advance notice effect, by using the title pattern determination table (see FIG. 43A), and sets the title pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. Details of this title pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 43 (a).

In step S1443-15, the sub CPU 120a sets the title advance notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined title pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the title advance notice effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the title advance notice effect is executed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-16 whether or not the determined advance notice pattern is a advance notice pattern for executing the cut-in advance notice effect. If it is a notice pattern that executes the cut-in notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-17, and if it is a notice pattern that does not execute the cut-in notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-19.

The cut-in notice effect is a big hit notice in which the player is made to operate the effect button 35 when the SP reach or SPSP reach is being executed, and the image display device 31 displays a character image according to the big hit expectation. It is a kind of production.

In step S1443-17, the sub CPU 120a determines a cut-in pattern, which is an effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, by using the cut-in pattern determination table (see FIG. 43 (b)), and sets the cut-in pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set. Details of this cut-in pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 43 (b).

In step S1443-18, the sub CPU 120a sets the cut-in advance notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined cut-in pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the cut-in notice effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the cut-in notice effect is executed.

In step S1443-19, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the referenced variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern that executes the tempai effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the tempai effect, the process is transferred to step S1443-20, and if it is a variable effect pattern that does not execute the tempai effect, the process is transferred to step S1443-22.

In step S1443-20, the sub CPU 120a determines a button pattern, which is an effect mode of the tempai effect, using the button pattern determination table (see FIG. 44A), and sets the button pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. Details of this button pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 44 (a).

In step S1443-11, the sub CPU 120a sets the tempai effect designation command corresponding to the determined button pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the tempai effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the tempai effect is executed.

In step S1443-22, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the referenced variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern that executes the determined effect 2. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the determined effect 2, the process is moved to step S1443-23, and if it is a variable effect pattern that does not execute the determined effect 2, the jackpot notice effect determined process this time is ended.

In step S1443-23, the sub CPU 120a determines the determination effect 2 pattern, which is the effect mode of the determination effect 2, by using the determination effect 2 pattern determination table (see FIG. 44B), and determines a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. Set to. The details of the determination effect 2 pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 44 (b).

In step S1443-24, the sub CPU 120a sets the decision effect 2 designation command corresponding to the determined decision effect 2 pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the decision effect 2 designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the decision effect 2 is executed.

(Pre-reach notice decision table)
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a pre-reach advance notice determination table that is referred to when determining a pre-reach advance notice pattern. The pre-reach notice decision table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be decided.

There are three types of pre-reach notice notice patterns: "no notice" where the pre-reach notice is not executed, "line notice effect" where the dialogue notice effect is executed, and "step-up notice effect" where the step-up notice effect is executed. Is set, and the jackpot expectation is no notice <line notice production <step-up notice production.

The feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 40 is that the pre-reach notice is more likely to be executed and the jackpot expectation is lower in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result. It can be pointed out that the pre-reach advance notice is more likely to be executed when the fluctuation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when it is determined. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Serif pattern determination table)
FIG. 41A is a diagram showing a dialogue pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a dialogue pattern. The dialogue pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each dialogue pattern, and the dialogue pattern to be determined.

In the dialogue pattern, "normal dialogue" in which it is unknown whether or not a jackpot game may be executed, "reach confirmed dialogue" in which reach production is confirmed, and reach production may be executed. There are four categories, "Expectation UP dialogue" that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed, and "Probability dialogue (premier)" that confirms that the jackpot will be a big hit. A plurality of lines are set in, and the jackpot expectation is normal line <reach confirmed line <expectation UP line <probable line (big hit confirmed).

As a feature of the dialogue pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (a), the jackpot lottery result is more than the reach confirmed dialogue (reach confirmed dialogue, expectation UP dialogue, correctness) than when the jackpot lottery result is lost. It is easier to determine the dialogue), and the dialogue (reach) that is higher than the reach confirmed dialogue is more likely to be determined when the fluctuation production pattern with high jackpot expectation is determined than when the fluctuation production pattern with low jackpot expectation is determined. It is easy to determine the definite dialogue, the expected degree UP dialogue, and the correct dialogue). By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Step-up pattern determination table)
FIG. 41B is a diagram showing a step-up pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a step-up pattern. The step-up pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each step-up pattern, and the determined step-up pattern.

The step-up pattern includes "normal SU1" in which the first step effect is executed, "normal SU2" in which the first and second step effects are executed, and "normal SU2" in which the first to third step effects are executed. "SU3", "normal SU4" in which the first to fourth step effects are executed, "normal SU5" in which the first to fifth step effects are executed, and the jackpot game in which the first to fifth step effects are executed Six types of "winning SU5 (premier)" that are confirmed to be executed are set, and the jackpot expectation is normal SU1 <normal SU2 <normal SU3 <normal SU4, normal SU5 <winning SU5.

As a feature of the step-up pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 (b), it is easier to determine the step-up pattern in which the number of executions of the step effect is larger in the case of the jackpot than in the case where the jackpot lottery result is lost, and the jackpot The point that the step-up pattern with a large number of executions of the step effect is more likely to be determined when the variation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when the variation effect pattern with a low expectation is determined. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Notice decision table during reach)
FIG. 42A is a diagram showing a reach advance notice determination table that is referred to when determining a reach advance notice determination pattern. The notice lottery result during reach, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be decided are associated with each other.

There are two types of notice patterns for the notice during reach: "no notice" in which the notice during reach is not executed, and "character group notice effect" in which the character group notice effect is executed, and the jackpot expectation is no notice. <It is a character group notice production.

The features of the reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 42 (a) are that the reach notice (character group notice effect) is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case where the big hit lottery result is lost. The point that the notice during reach (character group notice production) is easier to be executed when the fluctuation production pattern with high jackpot expectation is determined than when the fluctuation production pattern with low jackpot expectation is determined. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The title notice effect and the cut-in notice effect will be executed if they are the SP reach effect pattern and the SPSP reach effect pattern regardless of the jackpot lottery result, and the execution contents are shown in the table shown in FIG. 43. Each will be decided.

(Character group pattern determination table)
FIG. 42B is a diagram showing a character group pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a character group pattern. The character group pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each character group pattern, and the determined character group pattern.

The character group pattern includes a "first character group" in which the first character group is displayed, a "second character group" in which the second character group is displayed, and a "third character group" in which the third character group is displayed. , 4 types of "4th character group (premier)" that the 4th character group is displayed and it is confirmed that it will be a big hit are set, and the jackpot expectation is 1st character group <2nd character group < The 3rd character group <4th character group (big hit confirmed).

A feature of the character group pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42B is that it is determined that a variable effect pattern equal to or higher than the SP reach effect is executed when the character group notice effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the character group notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Title pattern determination table)
FIG. 43A is a diagram showing a title pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a title pattern. The title pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each title pattern, and the determined title pattern.

The title pattern includes "normal color" in which the title is displayed in normal color (for example, white), "blue" in which the title is displayed in blue, "red" in which the title is displayed in red, and rainbow color in the title. Four types of "rainbow color (premier)" that are displayed and confirmed to be a jackpot are set, and the jackpot expectation is normal color <blue <red <rainbow color (big hit confirmed).

When a pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined, the title pattern may be displayed by switching to a pattern with a high jackpot expectation after displaying a pattern with a low jackpot expectation.
Specifically, when "red" is determined, the display is once displayed in "blue" and then switched from "blue" to "red".
In addition, such switching may be switched step by step to a pattern with a high expectation of jackpot, or may be switched by skipping one step such as switching from "normal color" to "red".
It should be noted that such pattern switching may be performed by releasing the "color UP" icon in the "first stock effect" described later, or the pattern may be switched without going through the "first stock effect". You may be broken.

(Cut-in pattern determination table)
FIG. 43B is a diagram showing a cut-in pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a cut-in pattern. The cut-in pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each cut-in pattern, and the determined cut-in pattern.

The cut-in pattern includes "normal color" where the cut-in is displayed in normal color (for example, white), "blue" where the cut-in is displayed in blue, "red" where the cut-in is displayed in red, and cut. There are four types of "rainbow color (premier)" that the inn is displayed in rainbow color and it is confirmed that it will be a big hit, and the jackpot expectation is normal color <blue <red <rainbow color (big hit confirmed) It has become.

As the cut-in pattern, when a pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined, a pattern with a low jackpot expectation may be displayed once, and then the pattern may be switched to a pattern with a high jackpot expectation and displayed.
Specifically, when "red" is determined, the display is once displayed in "blue" and then switched from "blue" to "red".
In addition, such switching may be switched step by step to a pattern with a high expectation of jackpot, or may be switched by skipping one step such as switching from "normal color" to "red".

(Button pattern determination table)
FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a button pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a button pattern in the tempai effect. The button pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each button pattern, and the button pattern to be determined.

There are two types of button patterns, "single hit", which allows the effect button 35 to be operated once, and "continuous hit", which allows the effect button 35 to be operated multiple times. Is single hit <continuous hit.
The tempai effect may be performed by releasing the "single button hit" icon or the "button repeated hit" icon in the "second stock effect" described later, or may be performed without going through the "second stock effect". You may.

(Decision production 2 pattern determination table)
FIG. 44B is a diagram showing a determination effect 2 pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a pattern in the determination effect 2. The determined effect 2 pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each determined effect 2 pattern, and the determined effect 2 pattern.

There are two types of fixed effect 2 patterns, "single hit", which allows the effect button 35 to be operated once, and "continuous hit", which allows the effect button 35 to be operated multiple times. Expectations are single hit <continuous hit.
The decision effect 2 may be performed by releasing the "single button hit" icon or the "button repeated hit" icon in the "second stock effect" described later, or may be performed without going through the "second stock effect". You may be broken.

(Stock notice production decision processing)
Next, the stock notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a stock advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determined in step S1444-1. Then, in step S1444-2, it is determined whether or not the game is in a low-probability non-time-saving game state. If it is in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the process is transferred to step S1444-3, and if it is not in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the process is transferred to step S1444-6.

In step S1444-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the first stock advance notice using the first stock advance notice determination table (see FIG. 46 (a)). Then, when it is decided to execute the first stock notice, the information indicating that the first stock notice is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the first stock notice determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 46 (a).

In step S1444-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the first stock notice. That is, in step S1444-3, when the information indicating that the first stock notice is executed is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the first stock notice is executed. When the first stock notice is executed, the process is moved to step S1444-5, and when the first stock notice is not executed, the stock notice effect determination process this time is ended.

In step S1444-5, the sub CPU 120a performs the first stock advance notice effect determination process.
Specifically, based on the determined variable effect pattern (effect configuration defined in the variable effect pattern), the icon change scenario, the determined jackpot notice effect, etc., whether or not the first stock effect is executed, A process for determining the display mode of the stock icon in the first stock effect is performed. The details of the first stock notice effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

In step S1444-6, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the second stock notice using the second stock notice determination table (see FIG. 46B). Then, when it is decided to execute the second stock notice, the information indicating that the second stock notice is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the second stock notice determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 46 (b).

In step S1444-7, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the second stock notice. That is, in step S1444-6, when the information indicating that the second stock notice is executed is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the second stock notice is executed. When the second stock notice is executed, the process is moved to step S1444-8, and when the second stock notice is not executed, the stock notice effect determination process this time is ended.

In step S1444-8, the sub CPU 120a performs the second stock notice effect determination process.
Specifically, based on the determined variation effect pattern (effect configuration defined in the variation effect pattern), the presence / absence of execution of the second stock effect, the display mode of the stock icon in the second stock effect, and the like are determined. Perform the processing for. The details of the second stock notice effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

In this way, in the case of the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first stock notice is the execution target, and in the case of not the low-probability non-time-saving game state (for example, the high-probability time-saving game state), the first stock notice is A different second stock notice was targeted for execution.
As a result, different stock notices are executed depending on whether the game is in the low-probability non-time-saving game state or not, so that it is possible to provide a game machine that is less likely to get bored.

(1st stock notice decision table)
FIG. 46A is a diagram showing a first stock notice determination table that is referred to when determining the first stock notice. The first stock notice determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute, and whether or not to execute.

As a feature of the first stock notice determination table shown in FIG. 46 (a), the first stock notice is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss in the big hit lottery result, and the degree of expectation of a big hit is high. The first stock notice is more likely to be executed when the fluctuation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when the variation effect pattern with a low jackpot expectation is determined. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.
The distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute may be arbitrarily changed. For example, when executing SPSP reach, "execution" may always be determined.

(2nd stock notice decision table)
FIG. 46B is a diagram showing a second stock notice determination table that is referred to when determining the second stock notice. In the second stock notice determination table, the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute, and the presence or absence of execution are associated.

As a feature of the second stock notice determination table shown in FIG. 46 (b), the second stock notice is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss in the big hit lottery result, and the degree of expectation of a big hit is high. The second stock notice is more likely to be executed when the variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when the low variable effect pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.
The distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute may be arbitrarily changed. For example, when executing SPSP reach, "execution" may always be determined.

(1st stock notice production decision processing)
Next, the first stock advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the first stock notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determined in step S1444-5-1. Then, in step S1444-5-2, the icon change scenario (FIG. 35) set in the icon change effect determination process of FIG. 33 is referred to.

In step S1444-5-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the variable icon change effect. That is, based on the icon change scenario referred to in step S1444-5-2, it is determined whether or not the scenario is such that the variable icon change effect is executed. When the variable icon change effect is executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-5-4, and when the variable icon change effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-5-8.

In step S1444-5-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the variable icon stock is executed by using the variable icon stock determination table (see FIG. 48 (a)). Then, when it is decided to execute the variable icon stock, information indicating that the variable icon stock is executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the stock determination table for the variable icon will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 (a).

In step S1444-5-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the variable icon stock. That is, in step S1444-5-4, when the information indicating that the variable icon stock is to be executed is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the variable icon stock is to be executed. When the variable icon stock is executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-5-6, and when the variable icon stock is not executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-5-8.

In step S1444-5-6, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 50) of the first stock notice effect. Then, when the display mode of the stock is determined, the information indicating the display mode of the stock is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the stock display mode determination table of the first stock notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

The sub CPU 120a sets the stock advance notice effect designation command for the variable icon determined in step S1444-5-7 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock notice effect designation command for the variable icon is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the first stock notice effect related to the variable icon is executed.

In step S1444-5-8, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute a title pattern other than the normal color. That is, in step S1443-14 in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not a title pattern other than the normal color has been determined. If a title pattern other than the normal color is determined, the process is transferred to step S1444-5-9, and if a title pattern other than the normal color is not determined, the process is transferred to step S1444-5-13.

In step S1444-5-9, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the title advance notice effect stock by using the title advance notice effect stock determination table (see FIG. 48B). Then, when it is decided to execute the title advance notice effect stock, information indicating that the title advance notice effect stock is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the stock determination table for the title notice production will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 (b).

In step S1444-5-10, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the title advance notice effect stock. That is, in step S1444-5-9, when the information indicating that the title advance notice effect stock is to be executed is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the title advance notice effect stock is to be executed. When the title advance notice effect stock is executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-5-11, and when the title advance notice effect stock is not executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-5-13.

In step S1444-5-11, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 50) of the first stock notice effect. Then, when the display mode of the stock is determined, the information indicating the display mode of the stock is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c.

The sub CPU 120a sets the determined title advance notice effect stock advance notice effect designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c in step S1444-5-12. As a result, the stock advance notice effect designation command for the title advance notice effect is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the first stock advance notice effect related to the title advance notice effect is executed.

In step S1444-5-13, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute a cut-in pattern other than the normal color. That is, in step S1443-17 in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not a cut-in pattern other than the normal color has been determined. If a cut-in pattern other than the normal color is determined, the process is moved to step S1444-5-14, and if a cut-in pattern other than the normal color is not determined, the process is performed in step S1444-5-18. Move.

In step S1444-5-14, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect stock using the cut-in notice effect stock determination table (see FIG. 48C). Then, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect stock, information indicating that the cut-in notice effect stock is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the stock determination table for the cut-in notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 (c).

In step S1444-5-15, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect stock. That is, in step S1444-5-14, when the information indicating that the cut-in notice effect stock is to be executed is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the cut-in notice effect stock is to be executed. When the cut-in notice effect stock is executed, the process is moved to step S1444-5-16, and when the cut-in notice effect stock is not executed, the process is moved to step S1444-5-18.

In step S1444-5-16, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 50) of the first stock notice effect. Then, when the display mode of the stock is determined, the information indicating the display mode of the stock is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c.

The sub CPU 120a sets the stock advance notice effect designation command for the cut-in advance notice effect determined in step S1444-5-17 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock notice effect designation command for the cut-in notice effect is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the first stock notice effect related to the cut-in notice effect is executed.

In step S1444-5-18, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the SP reach or the SPSP reach effect. That is, it is determined whether or not to execute the SP reach or the SPSP reach effect based on the referenced variable effect pattern. When executing the SP reach or SPSP reach effect, the process is transferred to step S1444-5-19, and when the SP reach or SPSP reach effect is not executed, the first stock notice effect determination process this time is ended.

In step S1444-5-19, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the development effect stock is executed by using the development effect stock determination table (see FIG. 49A). Then, when it is decided to execute the development effect stock, the information indicating that the development effect stock is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the stock determination table for development effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 (a).

The development effect is an effect executed when developing from normal reach to SP reach or from normal reach to SPSP reach. Specifically, it is an effect of notifying that the first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) has been developed into SP reach or SPSP reach by moving the first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) downward after once notifying the loss by the normal reach.

In step S1444-5-20, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the development effect stock. That is, in step S1444-5-19, when the information indicating that the development effect stock is to be executed is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the development effect stock is to be executed. When the development effect stock is executed, the process is moved to step S1444-5-21, and when the development effect stock is not executed, the first stock notice effect determination process this time is ended.

In step S1444-5-21, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 50) of the first stock notice effect. Then, when the display mode of the stock is determined, the information indicating the display mode of the stock is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c.

The sub CPU 120a sets the development effect stock advance notice effect designation command determined in step S1444-5-22 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock advance notice effect designation command for the development effect is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the first stock advance notice effect related to the development effect is executed.

In step S1444-5-23, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stock for the determination effect 1 is executed by using the stock determination table for the determination effect 1 (see FIG. 49B). Then, when it is decided to execute the stock for the determined effect 1, information indicating that the stock for the determined effect 1 is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the stock determination table for the determination effect 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 (b).

The "decision effect 1" is an effect executed in the variation effect pattern determination table (low probability non-time saving game state) of FIG. 37 in the variation effect pattern for executing SP reach or SPSP reach.
Specifically, it is an effect of notifying the result of the big hit lottery by having the player operate the effect button 35 at the final stage of the SP reach or SPSP reach, and as a suggestion event of the timer effect (see FIG. 56 etc.) described later. Is also determined.
Further, the "decision effect 1" includes a decision effect 1 (for example, FIG. 69 (w)) executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, and a decision effect 1 (for example,) executed when the jackpot lottery result is lost. For example, there is FIG. 70 (w-1)). In the following, these may be collectively referred to simply as "decision production 1".

In step S1444-5-24, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the stock for the determination effect 1. That is, in step S1444-5-23, when the information indicating that the stock for the determined effect 1 is executed is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the stock for the determined effect 1 is executed. When the stock for the decision effect 1 is executed, the process is moved to step S1444-5-25, and when the stock for the decision effect 1 is not executed, the first stock notice effect determination process this time is ended.

In step S1444-5-25, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 50) of the first stock notice effect. Then, when the display mode of the stock is determined, the information indicating the display mode of the stock is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1444-5-26, the sub CPU 120a sets the determined stock advance notice effect designation command for the determination effect 1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock advance notice effect designation command for the determination effect 1 is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the first stock advance notice effect related to the determination effect 1 is executed.

(Stock determination table for the variable icon)
FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a stock determination table for the variable icon that is referred to when determining the stock for the variable icon. The stock determination table for the variable icon is associated with the final display mode of the icon, the distribution ratio (%) of the presence / absence of execution, and the presence / absence of execution.

A feature of the variable icon stock determination table shown in FIG. 48 (a) is that the variable icon stock is more easily executed when the final display mode of the icon having a high jackpot expectation is determined. Be done. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Stock decision table for title notice production)
FIG. 48B is a diagram showing a title advance notice production stock determination table that is referred to when determining the title advance notice effect stock. The title pattern, the distribution ratio (%) of the presence / absence of execution, and the presence / absence of execution are associated with the stock determination table for the title notice effect.

A feature of the title advance notice production stock determination table shown in FIG. 48 (b) is that the title advance notice effect stock is more likely to be executed when a title pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Stock decision table for cut-in notice production)
FIG. 48C is a diagram showing a cut-in notice effect stock determination table that is referred to when determining the cut-in notice effect stock. The cut-in notice effect stock determination table is associated with a cut-in pattern, a distribution ratio (%) of whether or not execution is performed, and whether or not execution is performed.

A feature of the cut-in notice effect stock determination table shown in FIG. 48 (c) is that the cut-in notice effect stock is more easily executed when the cut-in pattern with high jackpot expectation is determined. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Stock decision table for development production)
FIG. 49A is a diagram showing a development effect stock determination table that is referred to when determining the development effect stock. The stock determination table for development effect is associated with a variable effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) of execution / non-execution, and execution / non-execution.

The characteristics of the development production stock determination table shown in FIG. 49 (a) are that the development production stock is more easily executed and the jackpot expectation level is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case where the jackpot lottery result is lost. It can be pointed out that the stock for development production is more easily executed when a higher fluctuation production pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.
The distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute may be arbitrarily changed. For example, when executing SPSP reach, "execution" may always be determined.

(Stock decision table for decision production 1)
FIG. 49B is a diagram showing a stock determination table for determination effect 1 that is referred to when determining stock for determination effect 1. The stock determination table for the determination effect 1 is associated with a variation effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) of execution presence / absence, and execution presence / absence.

As a feature of the stock determination table for determination effect 1 shown in FIG. 49 (b), the stock for determination effect 1 is executed when the SPSP reach is determined as compared with the case where the SP reach is determined. There is a point that it is easy to be done. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.
The distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute may be arbitrarily changed. For example, when executing SPSP reach, "execution" may always be determined.

(Stock display mode determination table for the first stock notice production)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a stock display mode determination table of the first stock notice effect, which is referred to when determining the stock display mode of the first stock notice effect. The stock display mode determination table of the first stock notice effect is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) of the display mode, and the display mode.
The stock display mode is a display mode of an icon displayed on the image display device 31 when it is determined in FIG. 47 to execute any of the stocks. For example, the “gimmick operation” shown in FIG. 66 (a). Is displayed with a "clear" icon such as "", or is displayed with a "partially clear" icon such as "color UP" shown in FIG. 66 (a), for example, shown in FIG. 66 (b). It may be displayed with an "unclear" icon such as "?". The definitions of "clear", "partially clear", and "unclear" will be described later in FIG.

In the stock display mode determination table of the first stock notice effect of FIG. 50, either "clear or partially clear" or "unclear" is determined as the stock display mode. In addition, "clear or partially clear" and "unclear" are equally determined regardless of the type of variable effect pattern.
For example, if it is determined in FIG. 47 to execute the stock for the variable icon and “clear or partially clear” is determined in FIG. 50, the icon “color UP” shown in FIG. 66 can be acquired by the acquisition effect described later. On the other hand, when "unclear" is determined in FIG. 50, the icon "?" Shown in FIG. 66 can be acquired by the acquisition effect described later. When it is time to release the icon, the icon "Color UP" appears from the icon "?".
Further, for example, if it is determined in FIG. 47 to execute the stock for cut-in effect and “clear or partially clear” is determined in FIG. 50, the icon “button PUSH” shown in FIG. 66 can be acquired in the acquisition effect described later. .. On the other hand, when "unclear" is determined in FIG. 50, the icon "?" Shown in FIG. 66 can be acquired by the acquisition effect described later. When it is time to release the icon, the icon "Button PUSH" appears from the icon "?".
Further, for example, if it is determined in FIG. 47 to execute the development effect stock and “clear or partially clear” is determined in FIG. 50, the icon “gimmick operation” shown in FIG. 66 can be acquired in the acquisition effect described later. On the other hand, when "unclear" is determined in FIG. 50, the icon "?" Shown in FIG. 66 can be acquired by the acquisition effect described later. When the time to release the icon arrives, the icon "gimmick operation" appears from the icon "?".

(2nd stock notice production decision processing)
Next, the second stock advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a second stock notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determined in step S1444-8-1. Then, in step S1444-8-2, it is determined whether or not to execute the tempai effect. That is, as a result of referring to the variation effect pattern, it is determined that the tempai effect is executed when the variation effect pattern is such that the tempai effect is executed. When the tempai effect is executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-8-3, and when the tempai effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-8-7.

In step S1444-8-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the tempai production stock is executed by using the tempai production stock determination table (see FIG. 52A). Then, when it is decided to execute the tempai effect stock, information indicating that the tempai effect stock is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the stock determination table for tempai production will be described later with reference to FIG. 52 (a).

In step S1444-8-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the tempai effect stock. That is, in step S1444-8-3, when the information indicating that the tempai effect stock is to be executed is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the tempai effect stock is to be executed. When the tempai effect stock is executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-8-5, and when the tempai effect stock is not executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-8-7.

In step S1444-8-5, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 52B) of the tempai effect. Then, when the display mode of the stock is determined, the information indicating the display mode of the stock is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the stock display mode determination table of the tempai effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 52 (b).

The sub CPU 120a sets the determined stock advance notice effect designation command for tempai effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c in step S1444-8-6. As a result, the stock advance notice effect designation command for the tempai effect is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the second stock advance notice effect related to the tempai effect is executed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1444-8-7 whether or not to execute the SP reach or the SPSP reach effect. That is, it is determined whether or not to execute the SP reach or the SPSP reach effect based on the referenced variable effect pattern. When the SP reach or SPSP reach effect is executed, the process is moved to step S1444-8-8, and when the SP reach or SPSP reach effect is not executed, the second stock notice effect determination process of this time is ended.

In step S1444-8-8, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the determination effect 2. That is, as a result of referring to the variation effect pattern, it is determined whether or not the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern 58, 59, 66, 67, 81, 82, 89, 90) executes the determined effect 2. When the determination effect 2 is executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-8-9, and when the determination effect 2 is not executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-8-13.

In step S1444-8-9, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stock for the determination effect 2 is executed by using the stock determination table for the determination effect 2 (see FIG. 53A). Then, when it is decided to execute the stock for the determined effect 2, information indicating that the stock for the determined effect 2 is executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the stock determination table for the determination effect 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 (a).

In step S1444-8-10, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the stock for the determination effect 2. That is, in step S1444-8-9, when the information indicating that the stock for the determined effect 2 is executed is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the stock for the determined effect 2 is executed. When the stock for the determination effect 2 is executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-8-11, and when the stock for the determination effect 2 is not executed, the process is transferred to step S1444-8-13.

In step S1444-8-11, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 53B) of the determination effect 2. Then, when the display mode of the stock is determined, the information indicating the display mode of the stock is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the stock display mode determination table of the determination effect 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 (b).

In step S1444-8-12, the sub CPU 120a sets the determined stock advance notice effect designation command for the determination effect 2 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock advance notice effect designation command for the determination effect 2 is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the second stock advance notice effect related to the determination effect 2 is executed.

In step S1444-8-13, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a discrepancy between the actual operation mode and the display mode. If it is determined that there is a discrepancy between the actual operation mode and the display mode, the process is moved to step S1444-8-14, and if it is determined that there is no discrepancy between the actual operation mode and the display mode, the present second 2 End the stock notice production decision process.
The discrepancy between the actual operation mode and the display mode will be described later in FIGS. 52 (b) and 53 (b), but when "continuous hit" is determined as the button pattern, the display mode is "single hit". May be decided. That is, although the actual operation mode is "continuous hitting", the display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 31 may be "single hit". As described above, the jackpot expectation of the button pattern has a relationship of single hit <continuous hit, and the player wants that "continuous hit" is displayed as an icon. Therefore, even if the actual operation mode is "continuous hit", the display mode is changed to "continuous hit" by displaying "single hit" once and then promoting the icon. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

The sub CPU 120a sets the determined stock display mode change effect designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c in step S1444-8-14. As a result, the determined stock display mode change effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the second stock notice effect related to the tempai effect is executed.

(Stock decision table for Tempai production)
FIG. 52A is a diagram showing a tempai production stock determination table that is referred to when determining the tempai production stock. The button pattern, the distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute, and the presence or absence of execution are associated with the stock determination table for tempai production.

The feature of the tempai production stock determination table shown in FIG. 52 (a) is that the tempai production stock is more easily executed when the continuous hitting is decided than when the single hit is decided. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.
The distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute may be arbitrarily changed. For example, when executing repeated hits, "execution" may be determined without fail.

(Stock display mode determination table for tempai production)
FIG. 52B is a diagram showing a stock display mode determination table for the tempai effect, which is referred to when determining the stock display mode for the tempai effect. The button pattern, the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern, the distribution ratio (%) of the display mode, and the display mode are associated with the stock display mode determination table of the tempai effect.

As a feature of the stock display mode determination table of the tempai effect shown in FIG. 52 (b), when a single hit is determined as the button pattern, it is possible to determine only the single hit as the display mode and to determine the continuous hit. Absent. On the other hand, when repeated hits are determined as the button pattern, single hits and repeated hits are set as display modes. If continuous striking is determined as the button pattern and single striking is determined as the display mode, it is determined that there is a discrepancy in step S1444-8-13 of FIG. 51 described above.
In addition, when the button pattern is determined to be a continuous hit, the case where the big hit lottery result is a big hit is easier to determine the single hit than the case where the hit is lost. That is, when the icon changes from the single hit icon to the continuous hit icon, it is possible to expect that the jackpot game will be given.

(Stock decision table for decision production 2)
FIG. 53A is a diagram showing a stock determination table for determination effect 2 that is referred to when determining stock for determination effect 2. The stock determination table for the determination effect 2 is associated with the determination effect 2 pattern, the distribution ratio (%) of the presence / absence of execution, and the presence / absence of execution.

As a feature of the stock determination table for determination effect 2 shown in FIG. 53 (a), the stock for determination effect 2 is more likely to be executed when the continuous hit is determined than when the single hit is determined. There are points. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.
The distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute may be arbitrarily changed. For example, when executing repeated hits, "execution" may be determined without fail.

(Stock display mode determination table for determination effect 2)
FIG. 53B is a diagram showing a stock display mode determination table of the determination effect 2 that is referred to when determining the stock display mode of the determination effect 2. The stock display mode determination table of the determined effect 2 is associated with the determined effect 2 pattern, the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) of the display mode, and the display mode.

As a feature of the stock display mode determination table of the determination effect 2 shown in FIG. 53 (b), when a single hit is determined as the determination effect 2 pattern, only the single hit is determined as the display mode, and the continuous hit is the determination target. There is nothing to do. On the other hand, when continuous striking is determined as the determination effect 2 pattern, single striking and continuous striking are set as the display mode. In addition, when the continuous hitting is decided as the determination effect 2 pattern and the single hitting is decided as the display mode, it is determined that there is a discrepancy in the step S1444-8-13 of FIG. 51 described above.
Further, when the continuous hits are decided as the two patterns of the decision effect, the case where the big hit lottery result is a big hit is easier to decide the single hit than the case of the loss. That is, when the icon changes from the single hit icon to the continuous hit icon, it is possible to expect that the jackpot game will be given.

(Timer production decision processing)
Next, the timer effect determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a timer effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

First, in step S1445-1, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the current gaming state is a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. If it is in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the process is moved to step S1445-2, and if it is not in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the timer effect determination process this time is ended. That is, the timer effect is an effect executed when the game is in a low-probability non-time-saving game state.
The timer effect may be executed when the game is not in the low-probability non-time-saving game state.

In step S1445-2, the sub CPU 120a refers to the icon change scenario corresponding to the variable icon, and in step S1445-3, determines whether or not the variable icon change effect is executed. If the icon change effect is to be executed, the process is transferred to step S1445-4, and if the icon change effect is not to be executed, the process is transferred to step S1445-9.

The sub CPU 120a uses the change timer number determination table (see FIG. 55 (a)) in step S1445-4 to execute the change timer effect during the current variation effect (“0 times” or “1 time”). ) Is determined. Specifically, the icon final display mode of the variable icon is collated. Details of this change timer number determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 (a).

The change timer effect is an effect that suggests that the variable icon change effect is executed and the timing at which the variable icon change effect is executed. However, when the change timer effect is executed, It is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the change timer effect is used, and it can be determined that the change timer effect is achieved when the display mode of the variable icon changes.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1445-5 whether or not the number of times of the change timer effect determined is for executing the change timer effect. When the change timer effect is executed (the number of change timer effects is "1 time"), the process is transferred to step S1445-6, and the change timer effect is not executed (the number of change timer effects is "0"). In the case of "times"), the process is transferred to step S1445-9.

In step S1445-6, the sub CPU 120a determines the icon change for the suggestion event suggested by the change timer effect, and determines the change timer for the timer type classified according to the timer type and length.

In addition to the icon change, the suggestion event includes normal reach, pseudo-ream, zone effect, heat zone effect, next notice effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, decision effect 1, jackpot symbol stop, etc. ..

In addition to the change timer, the timer type includes a short timer which is a classification of a short timer time, a middle timer which is a classification of a long timer time, a long timer which is a classification of a long timer time, and the like. The timer time set by the four types of timers is change timer = short timer <middle timer <long timer.

The type of timer time of the change timer was the same as that of the short timer (5 seconds, 6 seconds, and 7 seconds), but the type of timer time was the same as that of the middle timer and long timer (15 seconds, 20 seconds). Seconds, 35 seconds, 40 seconds, 45 seconds, 50 seconds, and 55 seconds) may be provided.

In step S1445-7, the sub CPU 120a determines the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the change timer effect by using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 58). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, etc. are collated with the update pattern determination table. Details of this update pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

In step S1445-8, the sub CPU 120a sets the suggestion event and the timer effect designation command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the change timer effect during the variation effect is performed.

In step S1445-9, the sub CPU 120a refers to the current variation effect pattern, and in step S1445-10, a reach effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) equal to or higher than the SP reach effect is executed. Judge whether or not. When the reach effect equal to or higher than the SP reach effect is executed, the process is moved to step S1445-11, and when the reach effect equal to or higher than the SP reach effect is not executed, the timer effect determination process this time is ended.

The sub CPU 120a uses the event timer number determination table (see FIG. 55 (b)) in step S1445-11 to execute the number of event timer effects (“0 times” to “2 times”) during the current variation effect. ) Is determined. Specifically, the big hit lottery result, the variation effect pattern, etc. are collated with the event timer number determination table. Details of this event timer number determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 (b).

The event timer effect is an effect that suggests that any of a plurality of events (excluding icon changes) that expect the jackpot game to be executed in the process of executing the variable effect, and the timing at which the event occurs. However, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of event when the event timer effect is executed, and the type of event can be determined when the event occurs.

Since the above-mentioned change timer effect and event timer effect share the same execution mode during execution of each timer effect, which timer effect is executed when various timer effects are executed. It is difficult for the player to distinguish.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1445-12 whether or not the number of event timer effects determined is for executing the event timer effect. When the event timer effect is executed (the number of event timer effects is "1 time" or "2 times"), the process is transferred to step S1445-13, and the event timer effect is not executed (event timer effect). If the number of times is "0 times"), the timer effect determination process this time is terminated.

The sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the number of times of the event timer effect determined in step S1445-13 is one. If it is once, the process is transferred to step S1445-14, and if it is twice instead of once, the process is transferred to step S1445-17.

In step S1445-14, the sub CPU 120a uses the suggestion event determination table for one timer (see FIG. 56) to suggest the suggestion event by the event timer effect and the timer type classified according to the type and length of the timer. To determine. Specifically, the variation effect pattern and the like are collated with the suggestion event determination table for one timer. The details of the suggestion event determination table for one timer will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

In step S1445-15, the sub CPU 120a determines the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the event timer effect by using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 58). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, etc. are collated with the update pattern determination table.

In step S1445-15, the sub CPU 120a sets the suggestion event and the timer effect designation command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the timer effect determination process this time. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the event timer effect during the variation effect is performed.

In step S1445-17, the sub CPU 120a uses the first suggestion event determination table for the second timer (see FIG. 57 (a)) to suggest the suggestion event suggested by the first event timer effect, and the timer. Determine the timer type to be classified according to the type and length. Specifically, the variation effect pattern and the like are collated with the first suggestion event determination table for the timer twice. The details of the first suggestion event determination table for the two timers will be described later with reference to FIG. 57 (a).

In step S1445-18, the sub CPU 120a determines the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the first event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 58). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, etc. are collated with the update pattern determination table.

In step S1445-19, the sub CPU 120a sets the suggestion event and the timer effect designation command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the process for executing the first event timer effect is performed during the variation effect.

In step S1445-20, the sub CPU 120a uses the second suggestion event determination table for the second timer (see FIG. 57 (b)) to suggest the suggestion event suggested by the second event timer effect, and the timer. Determine the timer type classified by length. Specifically, the variation effect pattern and the like are collated with the second suggestion event determination table for the timer twice. Details of the second suggestion event determination table for the second timer will be described later with reference to FIG. 57 (b).

In step S1445-21, the sub CPU 120a determines the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the second event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 58). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, etc. are collated with the update pattern determination table.

In step S1445-22, the sub CPU 120a sets the suggestion event and the timer effect designation command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the timer effect determination process this time. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the second event timer effect during the variation effect is performed.

(Change timer count determination table)
FIG. 55A is a diagram showing a change timer number determination table that is referred to when determining the number of change timer effects executed during the variation effect. The change timer number determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the distribution ratio (%) for each change timer effect, and the number of change timer effects to be determined.

The number of times of the change timer effect is set to two types, "0 times" in which the change timer effect is not executed and "1 time" in which the change timer effect is executed.
The number of times of the change timer effect is not limited to the type of the present embodiment, and may be three types including the case where the change timer effect is executed twice, or may be executed a larger number of times.

A feature of the change timer number determination table shown in FIG. 55A is that the higher the jackpot expectation is, the easier it is for the change timer effect to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to effectively announce that the icon will change to the variable icon with a high expectation of a big hit, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.
The more the final display mode of the variable icon has a higher expectation of a big hit, the more difficult it is to execute the change timer effect.

(Event timer count determination table)
FIG. 55B is a diagram showing an event timer number determination table that is referred to when determining the number of event timer effects executed during the variation effect. The event timer number determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern, the distribution ratio (%) for each number of event timer effects, and the number of event timer effects to be determined.

The number of event timer effects includes "0 times" when the event timer effect is not executed, "1 time" where the event timer effect is executed once, and 2 times when the event timer effect is executed. Three types of "twice" are set.

The first feature of the event timer number determination table shown in FIG. 55 (b) is that the event timer effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result, and the jackpot expectation level. The event timer effect is more likely to be executed when the reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed than when the reach effect with a low value is executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the event timer number determination table shown in FIG. 55 (b) is that the number of executions of the event timer effect is more likely to occur in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result. Be done. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the number of times the event timer effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the event timer number determination table shown in FIG. 55 (b) is that the reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed more than the reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed. , The point that the number of executions of the event timer effect tends to increase. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Suggested event determination table for one timer)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a suggestion event when the event timer effect is executed once during the variation effect, and a suggestion event determination table for one timer, which is referred to when determining the timer type. The suggestion event determination table for one timer is associated with a variation effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestion event, a suggestion event to be determined, and a timer type.

Nine types of suggestion events are set: normal reach, pseudo-ream, zone production, next notice production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production, full rotation reach production, decision production 1, and jackpot symbol stop.

In addition, three types of timers are set: a short timer, which is a classification of a short timer time, a middle timer, which is a classification of a long timer time, and a long timer, which is a classification of a long timer time. The timer time set by the three types of timers is short timer <middle timer <long timer.

The first feature of the suggestion event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 56 is that the types of suggestion events are set to be different according to the variation effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the suggestion event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 56 is that as one event timer effect executed during the variation effect, an event executed at an early stage of the variation effect (for example, pseudo). It can be pointed out that the continuous, zone effect) is more likely to be determined as a suggestion event than the event (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, decision effect 1) that is executed at a later time of the variable effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player over a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the suggestion event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 56 is that the higher the jackpot expectation of the variation effect pattern, the earlier the event (for example, pseudo-ream, zone effect) is executed. An event (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, decision effect 1) that is executed at a later time of the variable effect is more likely to be determined as a suggestion event. By doing so, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player over a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the suggested event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 56 is that the higher the jackpot expectation is, the easier it is to determine the timer type for which a longer timer time is set (big hit expectation). The higher the degree, the easier it is to determine the long timer as the timer type). By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer production, the higher the expectation of a big hit, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

As the fifth feature of the suggestion event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 56, the occurrence of a predetermined event (for example, normal reach, pseudo-ream, SP reach effect, zone effect, SPSP reach effect, next notice effect) is generated. In the final phase (final stage) of the variable effect, the effect button 35 is executed when the event timer effect suggests the occurrence of a specific event (decision effect 1) is executed than when the suggestive event timer effect is executed. Is likely to be in a special state. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to which type of event is the suggestive event, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the suggested event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 56 is that the final phase of the variation effect is when the middle timer is determined rather than when the short timer is determined as the timer type. At the (final stage), the effect button 35 tends to be in a special state (protruding state). By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the suggested event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 56 is that the final phase of the variation effect is when the long timer is determined rather than when the middle timer is determined as the timer type. In the final stage), the effect button 35 tends to be in a special state (protruding state). By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Suggested event determination table for 2 timers)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a suggestion event when the event timer effect is executed twice during the variation effect, and a suggestion event determination table for the timer twice, which is referred to when determining the timer type. The suggestion event determination table for two timers is associated with a variation effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestion event, a suggestion event to be determined, and a timer type.

Note that FIG. 57A is a diagram showing a first suggestion event type and a first suggestion event determination table for two timers for determining the type of timer type, and FIG. 57B. ) Is a diagram showing a second suggestion event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the second suggestion event and the type of the timer type.

There are 10 types of suggestion events: normal reach, 1st pseudo-ream, 2nd pseudo-ream, zone production, 1st heat zone production, next notice production, SPSP reach production, decision production 1, full rotation reach production, and jackpot symbol stop. It is set.

In addition, three types of timers are set: a short timer, which is a classification of a short timer time, a middle timer, which is a classification of a long timer time, and a long timer, which is a classification of a long timer time. The timer time set by the three types of timers is short timer <middle timer <long timer.

The first feature of the suggestion event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 57 is that the types of suggestion events are set to be different according to the variation effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the suggestion event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 57 is that the two event timer effects executed during the fluctuation effect include an event executed at an early stage of the fluctuation effect. The point is that both events that are executed at a late stage of the fluctuation effect are easily determined as suggestive events. By doing so, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player over a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a third feature of the suggestion event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 57, the higher the jackpot expectation is, the easier it is to determine the timer type in which the longer timer time is set (the longer the timer time is set). The higher the jackpot expectation, the easier it is to determine the long timer as the timer type). By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer production, the higher the expectation of a big hit, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

Further, as the fourth feature of the suggestion event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 57, it is more specific than the case where the event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of a predetermined event (for example, SPSP reach effect) is executed. In the case where the event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of the event (decision effect 1) is executed, the effect button 35 is more likely to be in a special state in the final phase (final stage) of the variable effect. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to which type of event is the suggestive event, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as the fifth feature of the suggestion event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 57, the short timer as the timer type and the case where the long timer is determined rather than the case where the middle timer is determined. However, there is a point that the effect button 35 tends to be in a special state (protruding state) in the final phase (final stage) of the variable effect. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Update pattern determination table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an update pattern determination table that is referred to when determining an update pattern (effect mode) of the timer. The update pattern determination table is associated with the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, the distribution ratio (%) for each update pattern, and the determined update pattern. For reference, the timer time for each update pattern, the timer display mode, The timer display position and the feasibility of the standby display indicating that the execution of the timer effect is waiting are described.

The “normal pattern” is a normal update pattern in which the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the image display device 31 is subtracted by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it becomes 0 seconds.
The "special pattern" means that the timer (seconds) is rewound after the timer displayed in the predetermined area of the image display device 31 is subtracted by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it becomes 0 seconds. This is a special update pattern in which the data is subtracted by 1 until it reaches 0 seconds again.

The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the change timer is normal pattern 1 <normal pattern 2 <normal pattern 3.
The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the short timer is normal pattern 5 <normal pattern 6 <normal pattern 7.
The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the middle timer is normal pattern 11 <normal pattern 12 <normal pattern 13.
The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the long timer is as follows: normal pattern 21 <normal pattern 22 <normal pattern 23 <normal pattern 24 <normal pattern 25 <special pattern 1 <normal pattern 26 <normal pattern 27 <special pattern 2 < It is a normal pattern 28.

In this way, in the timer effect, a plurality of timer times (update patterns) are set, but the timer effect counts down to 0 seconds to perform a predetermined event (icon change effect, various reach effects, zone effect, effect button). Since it is an effect that suggests the occurrence of the operation valid period of 35, the stop display of the jackpot symbol, etc., and the timing when a predetermined event occurs, the count value is set regardless of the timer time (update pattern). Is counted up to the final destination (0 seconds in this embodiment).

The first feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that regardless of the timer type, the update pattern in which the jackpot lottery result has a longer timer time than in the case of a loss. There is a point that is easy to determine. By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer production, the higher the expectation of a big hit, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

The second feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that even if the timer time is the same, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the display mode (character color) of the timer. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the display mode of the timer, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Specifically, the jackpot expectation degree related to the timer display mode (character color) is white <blue <red <rainbow (big hit confirmed).

The third feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the longer the timer type is determined, the more the timer display mode (character color) is. By doing so, it is possible to impress that the higher the timer type in which the longer timer time is determined, the higher the jackpot expectation is, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the character color is illustrated as the display mode of the timer, it may be a font in addition to the character color, it may be a decorative part for decorating the timer, or it may be a composite thereof.

As the fourth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58, a plurality of character colors (white, blue, red, rainbow) are set as the display mode of the timer, and the type of the character color is the final icon. The same color as a part of the icon color types (white, blue, green, red, zebra, rainbow) set as the display mode is set. That is, the icon color set as the final icon display mode includes all the character colors set as the display mode of the timer. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand which character color timer has a high jackpot expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the permutation of the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the color type is also common to the icon color type set as the icon final display mode and the character color type set as the timer display mode.

The type of character color set as the display mode of the timer and the type of icon color set as the final display mode of the icon may be exactly the same type.

In addition to the final display mode of the icon, an effect (other effect) that suggests the jackpot expectation level using the display (emission) color is provided, and all the character colors set as the display mode of the timer, or Some may set the same color. Further, in this case as well, the permutation of the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the color type may be common to the display color of the timer and other effects.
Here, the other effects include, for example, a plurality of dialogue display colors may be provided in the dialogue advance notice effect, and the effect color and the emission color of the frame lighting device 34b change each time the step progresses in the step-up advance notice effect. It may change, and various effects can be expected.

The fifth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the jackpot expectation differs depending on the display position of the timer (the closer to the center of the screen, the higher the jackpot expectation). By doing so, the player becomes interested in the display position of the timer, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, since the display size of the timer differs depending on the display position of the timer, it can be said that the jackpot expectation differs depending on the timer display size (the larger the size, the higher the jackpot expectation).

The sixth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the timer subtraction starts after the standby display is performed, as compared with the case where the standby display indicating that the execution of the timer effect is waiting is not performed. There is a point that the expectation of big hit is higher when it is done. By doing so, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player even before the timer is subtracted, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when the timer times (total) are the same, the jackpot expectation is higher when the timer is updated with a special pattern than with the normal pattern. There is a point that it becomes high. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation of whether or not the pattern is a special pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the rewind time in the special pattern tends to be longer in the case of the jackpot than in the case where the jackpot lottery result is lost (depending on the timer time after rewinding). (The degree of expectation of big hits is different). By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the rewinding time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the initial timer time in the special pattern and the timer time after rewinding are different (the timer time after rewinding is shorter than the initial timer time). Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to effectively arouse the expectation of the player until the rewinding is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, an event suggested by the timer effect and an event not suggested by the timer effect (big hit notice effect) are set. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the variable effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it can be said that the number of events suggested by the timer effect and the number of events not suggested (big hit notice effect) are different. Specifically, the number of events suggested by the timer effect is larger than the number of events not suggested (big hit notice effect). It should be noted that the number of events that are not suggested by the timer effect may be larger than the number of events that are suggested.

In the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, it is always counted up to "0 seconds", but it may end in the middle without being counted up to "0 seconds". May be good. In the case of ending in the middle in this way, it is sufficient not to suggest any predetermined event (so-called ghost effect).

(Timer production and execution time)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61, the timer effect for each variable effect pattern in which the timer effect may be executed and the execution time of the timer effect will be described.
In FIGS. 59 to 61, "determined effect 1" is described as "valid period", and timer effect suggesting the occurrence of "determined effect 1" is described as "valid period generation timer effect".

In the timer effect, there is an "icon change timer effect" that suggests an icon change as a change timer effect, and as an event timer effect, a "pseudo-ream generation timer effect" that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo-ream, and a suggestion that a zone effect is started. "Zone generation timer effect", "Heat zone generation timer effect" that suggests the start of the heat zone effect, "Next notice generation timer effect" that suggests the start of the next notice effect, "Normal reach occurrence" that suggests the start of the normal reach effect "Timer effect", "SP reach generation timer effect" that suggests the start of SP reach effect, "SPSP reach generation timer effect" that suggests the start of SPSP reach effect, occurrence of the operation valid period of the effect button 35 (decision effect 1) There is a "valid period generation timer effect" that suggests (occurrence), and a "big hit symbol stop timer effect" that suggests the stop of the jackpot effect symbol.

The variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous advance notice is executed includes the "pseudo 1 variable period" which is the first variable period before the pseudo continuous advance notice is executed, and 2 associated with the execution of the pseudo continuous advance notice once. "Pseudo 2 fluctuation period" which is the second fluctuation period, "pseudo 3 fluctuation period" which is the third fluctuation period accompanying the execution of the pseudo continuous notice twice, and the pseudo continuous notice being executed three times. There are at least four periods of the "pseudo-four variation period" which is the fourth variation period that accompanies it.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), in the case of the variation effect pattern 10 or 33 (button non-collision), the icon change timer effect, the pseudo continuous generation timer effect, and the SP reach generation timer effect are executed. there is a possibility. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Further, the pseudo-continuous generation timer effect is started between T1 and T2 and ends at T2. Further, the SP reach generation timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 and T7, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 and T7.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state from T3, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state after T3.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the case of the variation effect pattern 11 or 34 (button non-collision), the icon change timer effect, the zone generation timer effect, and the SP reach generation timer effect can be executed. There is sex. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Further, the zone generation timer effect is started between T1 and T2 and ends at T2. Further, the SP reach generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T2 and T4 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T4.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 and T7, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 and T7.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state from T3, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state after T3.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), in the case of the variation effect pattern 12 or 35 (button non-collision), there is a possibility that the icon change timer effect and the validity period generation timer effect are executed.

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Further, the valid period generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T3 and T5, or without passing through the standby display, and ends by the timing of T5.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 to T2 and T3 to T7, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 and T7.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state from T3, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state after T3.

As shown in FIG. 59 (d), in the case of the variation effect pattern 13 or 36 (button non-collision), the icon change timer effect, the zone generation timer effect, and the valid period generation timer effect can be executed. There is sex. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T5 and ends by T5. Further, the zone generation timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the valid period generation timer effect is started from T4 to T6 and starts from the standby display, or starts without passing through the standby display and ends at T6.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 and T7, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 and T7.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state from T4, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state after T4.

As shown in FIG. 59 (e), in the case of the variation effect pattern 14 or 37 (button non-collision), there is a possibility that the icon change timer effect and the validity period generation timer effect are executed.

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T5 and ends by T5. Further, the valid period generation timer effect starts between T4 and T6 and ends at T6.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 to T3 and T4 to T8, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 and T8.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state from T4, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state after T4.

As shown in FIG. 60A, in the case of the variation effect pattern 16 or 39 (button non-collision), the icon change timer effect, the normal reach timer effect, the SPSP reach timer effect, and the valid period generation timer effect. Four may be executed. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Further, the normal reach generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T1 to T3 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T3. Further, the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started between T3 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the valid period generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T3 and T5 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T5.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 to T4 and T6 to T7, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 and T7.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state between T3 and T4, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state between T3 and T4, and the effect symbol 38 is not displayed T4 to T6. Is displayed in reach.

As shown in FIG. 60B, in the case of the variation effect pattern 17 or 40 (button non-collision), the icon change timer effect, the SPSP reach generation timer effect, and the validity period generation timer effect are executed. there is a possibility. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Further, the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started between T3 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the valid period generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T3 and T5 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T5.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 to T2, T3 to T4, and T6 to T7, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 to T7.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state between T3 and T4, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state between T3 and T4, and the effect symbol 38 is not displayed T4 to T6. Is displayed in reach.

As shown in FIG. 60 (c), in the case of the variation effect pattern 18 or 41 (button non-collision), the icon change timer effect, the zone generation timer effect, the SPSP reach generation timer effect, and the valid period generation timer effect. Four may be executed. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Further, the zone generation timer effect is started between T1 and T2 and ends at T2. Further, the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T2 and T4 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T4. Further, the valid period generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T3 and T5 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T5.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 to T4 and T6 to T7, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 and T7.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state between T3 and T4, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state between T3 and T4, and the effect symbol 38 is not displayed T4 to T6. Is displayed in reach.

As shown in FIG. 60 (d), in the case of the variation effect pattern 19 or 42 (button thrust), the icon change timer effect, the SPSP reach generation timer effect, and the validity period generation timer effect can be executed. There is sex. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Further, the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started between T3 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the valid period generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T3 and T5 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T5.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 to T2, T3 to T4, and T6 to T7, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 to T7.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state between T3 and T4, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state between T3 and T4, and the effect symbol 38 is not displayed T4 to T6. Is displayed in reach.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), in the case of the variation effect pattern 20 or 43 (button non-collision), the icon change timer effect, the pseudo continuous generation timer effect, the zone generation timer effect, the SPSP reach generation timer effect, There is a possibility that five of the validity period generation timer effects will be executed. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T5 and ends by T5. Further, the pseudo-continuous generation timer effect is started between T1 and T2 and ends at T2. The zone generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T1 to T3 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T3. Further, the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T3 and T5 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T5. The validity period generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T4 and T6 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T6.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 to T5 and T7 to T8, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 and T8.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state between T4 and T5, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state between T4 and T5, and the effect symbol 38 is not displayed T5 to T7. Is displayed in reach.

As shown in FIG. 61 (b), in the case of the variation effect pattern 21 or 44 (button non-collision), the icon change timer effect, the pseudo continuous generation timer effect, the zone generation timer effect, the SPSP reach generation timer effect, There is a possibility that five of the validity period generation timer effects will be executed. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T5 and ends by T5. Further, the pseudo-continuous generation timer effect is started between T1 and T2 and ends at T2. Further, the zone generation timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T3 and T6, or without passing through the standby display, and ends at T6. Further, the valid period generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T4 and T7 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T7.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 to T5 and T8 to T9, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 and T9.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state between T4 and T5, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state between T4 and T5, and the effect symbol 38 is not displayed T5 to T8. Is displayed in reach.

As shown in FIG. 61 (c), in the case of the fluctuation effect pattern 22 or 45 (button thrust), the icon change timer effect, the heat zone generation timer effect, the next notice generation timer effect, the SPSP reach generation timer effect, There is a possibility that five of the validity period generation timer effects will be executed. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T5 and ends by T5. Further, the heat zone generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T1 to T3 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T3. The next notice generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T2 and T5 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T5. The SPSP reach generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T3 and T6 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T6. The validity period generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T4 and T7 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T7.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 to T5 and T8 to T9, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 and T9.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state between T4 and T5, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state between T4 and T5, and the effect symbol 38 is not displayed T5 to T8. Is displayed in reach.

As shown in FIG. 61 (d), the variation effect pattern 46 (button non-collision) is an icon change timer effect, a heat zone generation timer effect, a next notice generation timer effect, an SPSP reach generation timer effect, and a jackpot symbol stop timer effect. Five may be executed. However, up to three timer effects are executed (in parallel) at the same time.

In this case, the icon change timer effect starts between T1 and T6 and ends by T6. The heat zone generation timer effect is started between T1 and T3 without passing through the standby display or the standby display and ends at T3. The next notice generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T2 and T6 or without passing through the standby display and ends at T6. The SPSP reach generation timer effect is started between T3 and T7 without passing through the standby display or the standby display and ends at T7. The jackpot symbol stop timer effect is started between T5 and T8 without the standby display or the standby display and ends at T8.

Further, the display of the effect symbol 38 is displayed between T0 to T6 and T8 to T9, and the display of the small effect symbol 48 is displayed between T0 and T9.
The effect symbol 38 is displayed in the reach state during T5 to T6, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state during T5 to T6, and the effect symbol 38 is not displayed T6 to T8. Is displayed in reach.

In this way, even if there are many timer effects whose execution times overlap, the number of timer effects executed at the same time (in parallel) is limited (up to 3). By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player's line of sight is too disturbed and he / she cannot concentrate on the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the limit number of timer effects executed at the same time differs for each variable effect pattern (timers executed at the same time for variable effect patterns with high jackpot expectations than for variable effect patterns with low jackpot expectations). There are many productions). By doing so, the player can estimate the jackpot expectation based on the number of timer effects executed at the same time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the timer effect is not executed in the operation promotion effect and the winning notification effect that are executed in the final phase (final stage) of the fluctuation effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without interfering with the winning notification production, which is one of the productions that the player is most interested in.

In addition, while the player is performing a high-profile effect (for example, next notice effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach, etc.), the effect symbol 38 is erased, and the small effect symbol 48 continues. It is supposed to be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to more effectively draw the attention of the player to the effect of high attention (without hindering the effect of high attention from the player), and the first special symbol (second). The player can grasp the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol).

Further, the execution period of the icon change timer effect is until the end of the normal reach effect period, but it may be the period until the reach is established, the end of the SP reach, or the end of the SPSP reach.

(Example of timer production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63, an effect example in which three timer effects are executed during the variation effect will be described. Here, in the normal game state, it is determined to execute the fluctuation effect pattern 45, the icon change timer effect (normal timer 1), the heat zone generation timer effect (normal pattern 11), and the SPSP reach generation timer effect (normal pattern 13). It shall be.

First, as shown in FIG. 62A, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends in a state where the number of reserved first special symbols is “2”, the image display device 31 displays the effect symbol 38 “234”. Is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation effect ends. In addition, the small effect symbol 48 is also stopped and displayed at "234".

Then, as shown in FIG. 62B, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, one of the first hold icons is changed to the variable icon TI, and the variable display of the effect symbol 38 is started. The variation effect is executed. After that, when the icon change timer effect is started, the white character timer HTW of "5 seconds left", which is a normal display, is displayed in the vicinity of the variable icon display area 31c, and the subtraction of the timer time is started. In addition, the variable display of the small effect symbol 48 is also started.
It should be noted that a thing that displays the timer time in the timer effect, such as the white character timer HTW, is sometimes called a "timer icon".
From the "timer icon", it is possible to grasp how the timer time is being subtracted, and to recognize how long it takes until "0 seconds left".

Next, after the white character timer HTW of the icon change timer effect reaches "0 seconds left" (see FIG. 62 (c)), when the character "GO !!" is displayed, the variable icon is white. The change from the icon to the blue icon is performed to change the variable icon (see FIG. 62 (d)). When the heat zone generation timer effect is started at this timing, the white character timer ZTW of "15 seconds left", which is a normal display, is displayed on the image display device 31, and the timer time subtraction is started. Although it is described in a simplified manner in FIG. 62 (d), strictly speaking, the fluctuation icon changes from a white icon to a blue icon after the display of "GO !!" Icon change effects are being performed.
That is, it can be said that the execution time of the effect to be performed after "0 seconds left" can be recognized from the "timer icon".

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (e), when the pseudo-continuous symbols suggesting the occurrence of the pseudo continuous notice as the middle effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the state where the loose stitches are temporarily stopped as the left and right effect symbols, the pseudo 1 variation The period ends. At this time, the white character timer ZTW becomes "12 seconds left", which is the timer time during subtraction.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (f), when the effect symbol starts to re-variate due to the occurrence of the pseudo-ream, the zone effect is started and the zone telop is displayed. At this time, the white character timer ZTW becomes "10 seconds left", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (g), when the pseudo-continuous symbols suggesting the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous notice are temporarily stopped as the middle effect symbols in the state where the loose stitches are temporarily stopped as the left and right effect symbols, the pseudo 2 The variable period ends. At this time, the white character timer ZTW becomes "one second left", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Then, after the production symbol starts re-variating due to the occurrence of the pseudo-ream and the white character timer ZTW reaches "0 seconds left" (see FIG. 62 (h)), the characters "GO !!" are displayed. Then, the heat zone effect is started and the heat zone telop is displayed (see FIG. 63 (a)). When the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started at this timing, the blue character timer STB of "more XX seconds", which is a standby display, is displayed on the image display device 31 directly above the white character timer ZTW. Although the description is simplified in FIG. 63 (a), strictly speaking, the heat zone effect is started and the heat zone telop is displayed after the display of "GO !!" is performed. It has become.

The blue character timer STB is displayed directly above the first hold icon display area 31a when the other timer (here, the white character timer ZTW) is not displayed, but the other timer is displayed. When it is, it is displayed directly above the other timers, and when the other timers are deleted, it moves directly above the first hold icon display area 31a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the same "3" as the left and right effect symbols temporarily stops to form a reach state, the normal reach effect is started. At this time, the variable icon changes from a blue icon to a green icon to perform the variable icon change effect, and the blue character timer STB becomes "20 seconds left", which is the normal display, and the timer time subtraction is started. To. At this time, the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the next notice effect is started, the characters “Next notice SPSP reach!” Are displayed on the image display device 31. Then, the effect symbol 38 forming the reach state is erased, the small effect symbol 48 is in the reach state, and the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 31a is erased. At this time, the blue character timer STB becomes "10 seconds left", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Then, after the blue character timer STB reaches "0 seconds left" (see FIG. 63 (d)), the characters "GO !!" are displayed and the SPSP reach effect is started (FIG. 63 (e)). reference). At this time, the effect symbol 38 remains erased, and the small effect symbol 48 is displayed in the reach state. Although the description is simplified in FIG. 63 (e), strictly speaking, the SPSP reach effect is started after the display of "GO !!" is performed.

Next, an example of the effect when two timer effects are executed during the variable effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. Here, it is assumed that the execution of the variation effect pattern 45, the next notice generation timer effect (normal pattern 21), and the valid period generation timer effect (special pattern 2) is determined in the normal game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), when the zone telop is displayed and the zone effect is being executed, the pseudo-continuous notice is given as the inner effect symbol with the disjointed eyes temporarily stopped as the left and right effect symbols. When the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the occurrence of is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-two variation period ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the effect symbol starts to re-variate due to the generation of the pseudo-ream. At this time, when the effective period generation timer effect is started, the white character timer YTW of "35 seconds left", which is a normal display, is displayed on the image display device 31, and the subtraction of the timer time is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), when the same "3" as the left and right effect symbols temporarily stops to form a reach state, the normal reach effect is started. At this time, the white character timer YTW becomes "10 seconds left", which is the timer time during subtraction. Further, the effect of the valid period generation timer is started, and the red character timer UTR of "more XX seconds", which is a standby display, is displayed on the image display device 31 at the upper part of the screen. At this time, the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the reach state.

After that, after the white character timer YTW reaches "0 seconds left" (see FIG. 64 (d)), when the characters "GO !!" are displayed, the next notice effect is started and the image display device 31 The text "Next notice SPSP reach!" Is displayed (see FIG. 64 (e)). Then, the effect symbol 38 forming the reach state is erased, the small effect symbol 48 is in the reach state, and the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 31a is erased. At this time, the red character timer UTR becomes "35 seconds left", which is a normal display, and the subtraction of the timer time is started. Although the description is simplified in FIG. 64 (e), strictly speaking, the next notice production is started after the display of "GO !!", and the image display device 31 is informed of the "next notice". The characters "SPSP reach!" Are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (f), when the SPSP reach effect is started, the red character timer UTR becomes "25 seconds left", which is the timer time during subtraction. At this time, the effect symbol 38 remains erased, and the small effect symbol 48 is displayed in the reach state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (g), when the red character timer UTR reaches "0 seconds left", the rewinding of the timer is started and the number of seconds of the timer increases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (h), when the rewinding of the timer is completed, the red character timer UTR becomes "15 seconds left", which is the normal display, and the subtraction of the timer time is restarted.

Next, when the character "GO !!" is displayed after the red character timer UTR reaches "0 seconds left" (see FIG. 65 (a)), the effect button 35 is in a special state (protruding state). The image display device 31 has a gauge image indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 35 and an operation promotion image SG (effect button in a special state) for prompting the operation of the effect button 35. An image imitating 35) is displayed (see FIG. 65 (b)). Although the description is simplified in FIG. 65 (b), strictly speaking, after the display of "GO !!", the effect button 35 changes to a special state (protruding state) and is operated. When the validity period occurs, the image display device 31 has a gauge image indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 35 and an operation promotion image SG (an image imitating the effect button 35 in a special state) for prompting the operation of the effect button 35. ) Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), when the effect button 35 is operated or the operation valid period elapses, the first decorative member 33a moves from the standby position to the center of the screen, which is the effect position, and the image display device 31 Is displayed with a light emitting effect EF centered on the first decorative member 33a (winning notification effect).

As described above, when the operation valid period of the effect button 35 becomes "0", the winning notification effect is started even if the effect button 35 is not operated, so that the effect can be said to be a kind of timer effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), the first decorative member 33a returns from the effect position to the standby position, the effect symbol 38 “333” is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect ends. In addition, the small effect symbol 48 is also stopped and displayed at "333".

In this way, since the timer in the icon change timer effect is displayed in the vicinity of the variable icon display area 31c, the player watching the icon change timer effect can visually recognize the variable icon change effect with almost no movement of the line of sight. Since it is possible, it is difficult to overlook the variable icon change effect, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Also, in the timer production, after the timer value reaches "0 seconds left", an abstract display of "GO !!" is displayed. That is, it is suggested that the value of the timer becomes "0 seconds left" and the effect to be executed after that (effect after update) is started, but the specific effect to be executed after that (effect after update) is concrete. I tried not to suggest the contents. As a result, it is difficult to overlook the start of the effect (post-update effect) to be executed after that, and it is possible to pay attention to what kind of effect (post-update effect) is executed.

In the timer production, after the timer value reaches "0 seconds left", the display is not limited to "GO !!", but may be displayed as "ready" or "0 seconds left". A special effect may be displayed (for example, an effect in which "0 seconds left" is burning). By doing so, it becomes difficult to overlook the event executed after the value of the timer reaches "0 seconds left", and it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

On the other hand, after the value of the timer reaches "0 seconds left", a character indicating an event to be executed after that (for example, in the example of FIG. 64 (e), the character "next notice", etc.) is displayed. (You may display the specific effect after the update). As a result, it becomes easy to understand what kind of event the predetermined event suggested by the timer effect is, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a pattern for displaying an event character after the timer value reaches "0 seconds" as in the present embodiment, and a timer value after the timer value reaches "0 seconds". A pattern for displaying that "0 seconds are left" may be mixed, and any pattern may be performed depending on the type of event. In this case, for example, when the event suggested by the timer effect is a definite effect, the timer value becomes "0 seconds left" after the timer value becomes "0 seconds left". It is better to use a pattern that displays a notification. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that the jackpot has been confirmed before the final effect is performed, and the final effect can be effectively executed.

In addition, when multiple timer effects are executed at the same time, the timers are displayed so that they do not overlap, so it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of making it difficult to see the number of seconds of the timers, which makes the game more enjoyable. It is possible to improve.

In addition, the countdown display (subtraction display) in the timer effect is updated at approximately the same interval as the actual time timing, so when the timer effect is started, it is possible to predict when any event will occur. The game can be effectively excited until the timing when a predetermined event occurs (the timer becomes 0 seconds), and the fun of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the timer is displayed so as to overlap the front of other production images (excluding the small production symbol 48), it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the number of seconds of the timer becomes difficult to see, and the interest of the game can be enjoyed. It is possible to improve. Note that a specific effect image (for example, an image of a notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit) may be displayed so as to overlap in front of the timer.

Further, the timer display may overlap in front of the effect symbol 38, but since it is not overlapped in front of the small effect symbol 48, the timer display may overlap in front of the effect symbol 38. Also, the player can grasp the execution state of the variation display of the first special symbol (second special symbol).

In the present embodiment, the jackpot notice effect can be executed while the timer effect is being executed, but the execution of the jackpot notice effect may be restricted during the execution of the timer effect. Specifically, the jackpot advance notice effect may not be completely executed, or a specific jackpot advance notice effect (at least one of the dialogue advance notice effect, the step-up advance notice effect, and the character group advance notice effect) is not executed. Other notice effects (line notice effect, step-up notice effect, rest of character group notice effect) may be executed. Further, during the execution of the timer effect, the execution of the definite effect that deterministically notifies that the jackpot will be a big hit may be restricted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer effect does not suggest the execution of the jackpot notice effect, but the execution of the jackpot notice effect may be suggested. In addition, when executing a final effect that deterministically notifies that a big hit will occur, the timer effect may be used to suggest the execution of the final effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel), a state in which the plurality of timers are displayed in the standby display can occur, but the state is displayed in the standby display. The timer may always be one.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the special pattern in the timer effect, the number of seconds is rewound when the timer reaches 0 seconds, but the number of seconds is added when the timer reaches 0 seconds ( (Rewriting) may be performed, or the subtraction of the number of seconds may be suspended until the timer reaches 0 seconds, and the subtraction may be started again after a predetermined period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the timer type of the timer effect is a short timer and a middle timer, a special pattern is not determined as an update pattern, and when it is a long timer, a special pattern is used as an update pattern. Although it is determined, a special pattern may be determined as an update pattern even in the case of a middle timer.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer is displayed on the image display device 31 to execute the timer effect, but a second display device different from the image display device 31 is provided and the timer is displayed on the second display device. The timer effect may be executed, or the display device that displays the timer may be different depending on the suggestion event and / or the timer type. For example, when the variable icon or the hold icon is displayed on the second display device, a timer suggesting an icon change is displayed on the second display device, and a timer suggesting other events is displayed on the image display device 31. For example, to display.

Further, in the present embodiment, when two timer effects are executed, the two timer effects do not suggest the same event, but the two timer effects may suggest the same event. You may. Specifically, when a variable effect pattern with a low jackpot expectation is determined, two timer effects are prevented from suggesting the same event, and a variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined. For example, two timer effects suggest the same event at a predetermined ratio.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the timer does not change in the middle, but may be changed in the middle. Specifically, the display mode is changed after the timer is rewound, or the display mode is changed after the timer is restarted after being added or paused.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer effect suggests an event that occurs during the variable effect, but the timer effect suggests the occurrence of a special effect that is executed based on the time information of the RTC (real-time clock). It may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer effect can be executed during the zone effect period, but the timer effect may not be executed or may be difficult to execute during the zone effect period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, the timer display does not disappear until the end, but the timer may be temporarily extinguished. In this case, the numerical value may be updated while the timer is off, or the numerical value update may be suspended while the timer is off.

Further, in the present embodiment, although there are a plurality of timer display sizes in the timer effect, only the same size may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer effect can be executed at the same time, but when it is executed at the same time, it is better not to start at the same time, and it is better not to end at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player's line of sight is too disturbed and he / she cannot concentrate on the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation valid period of the effect button 35 is only the one that occurs before the execution of the winning notification effect and the one that occurs before the dialogue display of the dialogue notice effect, but it also occurs in other effects. You may try to do it. For example, it may be generated before the reach is established, and whether or not the reach is reached may be encouraged according to the operation of the effect button 35.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing for erasing the effect symbol 38 is the execution period of the next notice effect, the SPSP reach effect, and the full rotation reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to these, and the execution period of the SP reach effect is also applicable. You may want to erase it.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect symbol 38 is deleted after being in the reach state, the small effect symbol 48 is in the reach state, but when the effect symbol 38 is in the reach state, the effect symbol is in the reach state. Even if 38 is not erased, the small effect symbol 48 may be in the reach state, or even if the effect symbol 38 is erased after it is in the reach state, the small effect symbol 48 may not be in the reach state. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the stop display of the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 48 is the same combination regardless of whether it is a big hit or a loss, but in the case of a big hit, the stop display is made in the same combination and the effect is lost. In the case of, different combinations may be used. For example, in the case of loss, there is only one combination of stop display of the small effect symbol 48.

(Figure explaining the icon in the first stock production)
Next, an example of the icon in the first stock effect will be described with reference to FIG. 66.
The term "at the time of icon acquisition" indicates a display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 31 when the icon is acquired.
Further, "when the icon is released" indicates a display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 31 when the icon is released.
In addition, the "effect corresponding to the release" indicates an effect that is executed by releasing the icon (without causing a large time lag from the release of the icon).
Further, the "post-release response effect" indicates an effect that is executed after the "release response effect" is performed (with a slight time lag from the release of the icon).
Here, the "release response effect" and the "post-release response effect" constitute a predetermined effect according to the game privilege.

First, FIG. 66A shows an example of a normal icon, and as an example of the normal icon, three types of “gimmick operation”, “button PUSH”, and “color UP” are shown.
"Gimmick operation" indicates that an operation effect in which the first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) is activated is generated, and the player who has acquired the icon marked "gimmick operation" releases the icon. Then, it can be recognized in advance that an operation effect in which the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) is activated is generated.
It should be noted that the "gimmick operation" is supported only by "the generation of the operation effect of the first decorative member 33a" as the effect corresponding to the release, and the other effects corresponding to the release and the effect corresponding to the release are not defined. That is, an icon such as "gimmick operation" is a "single target" (execution target) as shown in "Remarks" because the effect content described in the icon and the effect content to be executed are exactly the same. It is stipulated that the production is single).

In addition, the icon that becomes "single target" is only an icon called "gimmick operation" as an example, and if the production content to be executed is concretely described in the icon, what kind of icon is used? There may be. For example, it may be provided with an icon such as "SP reach title red" that can recognize in advance that the reach title of SP reach is displayed in red.

Next, the "button PUSH" indicates that an operation promotion effect that urges the player to press the effect button 35 (once) is generated, and the icon described as "button PUSH" has been acquired. The player can recognize in advance that when the icon is released, an effect of pressing the effect button 35 occurs.
It should be noted that the "button PUSH" corresponds to the "effect generation of pressing the effect button 35" as the effect corresponding to the release. That is, an icon such as "button PUSH" corresponds only to "the effect of pressing the effect button 35" when looking only at the effect corresponding to the release, and does not have any other effect corresponding to the release. It can be said that it is one target.
On the other hand, "cut-in effect generation" and "decision effect 1 generation" are supported as post-release response effects, and whether "cut-in effect generation" is executed or "decision effect 1 generation" is executed. It is difficult for the player to recognize the icon in advance when the icon is acquired. That is, for an icon such as "button PUSH", in the post-release response effect, the effect content described in the icon and the effect content to be executed do not completely match. Therefore, as shown in "Remarks", "plurality". It is defined as "target" (there are multiple effects to be executed).
Therefore, as shown in "Remarks", an icon such as "Button PUSH" is a single target (when viewed only in the response effect at the time of release) and multiple targets (when viewed including the response effect after release). It can be said that.

It should be noted that, as an example, only the icon "button PUSH" is given, and the corresponding effect at the time of release can be recognized in advance, but any icon can be used as long as the corresponding effect after release cannot be recognized in advance. May be good. For example, it may be an icon indicating the execution of the timer effect described above.
In the case of the timer effect, as described above, there are a plurality of suggestion events after the timer effect reaches "0 seconds left", and which suggestion event occurs until the timer effect reaches "0 seconds left". It has the characteristic that it cannot be grasped. Therefore, the suggestion event after the timer effect becomes "0 seconds left" can be regarded as the corresponding effect after the release.
Then, so that the player can recognize in advance that the timer effect will be performed when the icon is acquired, for example, if the icon marked "XX seconds" is displayed, the timer effect will be executed when the icon is released. Since it can be done, the icon has the same position as the "button PUSH" icon. Therefore, such an icon may be provided as an icon that becomes a "plurality target".

Next, "color UP" indicates that the reach title color change in SP reach or SPSP reach occurs, and the variable icon color change occurs, and the icon described as "color UP" is acquired. The player can recognize in advance that when the icon is released, a color change in some effect is performed. On the other hand, since only "color UP" is written, it is difficult to recognize in advance what kind of effect the color change will be performed when the icon is acquired.
It should be noted that "color UP" corresponds to "SP reach, SPSP reach title color change occurrence" and "the variation icon color change occurrence" as the release response effect, and the post-release response effect is not defined. That is, for icons such as "color UP", although the response effect after release is not defined, "SP reach, SPSP reach title color change occurrence" and "the variable icon color change occurrence" correspond as the release response effect. It becomes difficult for the player to recognize in advance whether "SP reach, SPSP reach title color change generation" is executed or "the variable icon color change generation occurs" is executed when the icon is acquired. There is. Therefore, for an icon such as "Color UP", the effect content written on the icon and the effect content to be executed do not completely match in the effect corresponding to the release, and unlike the "Button PUSH", the icon is released. Since it has a plurality of time-responsive effects, it is defined as "multiple targets" (multiple effects to be executed) as shown in "Remarks".

It should be noted that the icon "color UP" is merely given as an example, and any icon may be used as long as the effect corresponding to the release cannot be recognized in advance. For example, it is possible to recognize that chance UP is performed in some kind of production such as "chance UP", but it has an icon that makes it difficult to recognize in advance what production the chance UP will be performed in when the icon is acquired. You may.
The chance UP is, for example, an effect that a specific character image that is not normally displayed (without chance UP) is displayed in one scene during SP reach.
Further, the effect of increasing the color is not limited to the SP reach, the title of the SPSP reach, and the variable icon, and may be another effect. For example, when the character's dialogue displayed in SP reach or SPSP reach is provided with an effect of changing from a normal color (for example, white) to red, the effect may be a target for color UP.

Further, the color UP icon may be composed of a color in which the icon itself changes according to the effect corresponding to the release. For example, when it is decided to make the variable icon blue in the release response effect, a blue color UP icon is displayed, and when it is decided to make the variable icon red in the release response effect. A red color UP icon may be displayed on the. Further, the color UP icon of the color (for example, rainbow color) in which the jackpot game is confirmed to be given may be displayed. As a result, although it is difficult to recognize in advance what color change will be performed at the time of icon acquisition, it is possible to recognize in advance what color will be changed, which gives fun at the time of icon acquisition. be able to.
Further, for example, when the reach title is displayed in red and the variable icon is displayed in red, and the expectation that the jackpot game is given is different, the red color UP icon will be displayed. It is possible to play the game by hoping that it will be released by the production (reach title or the variable icon), or by the production with the higher expectation that the jackpot game will be given. Can be further improved.

Although it is described that each icon shown in FIG. 66A suggests the content of the effect such as "gimmick operation", "button PUSH", and "color UP", it is particularly suggested. The design is such that it is not possible to know when the production will be executed (it is not possible to know when the production will be executed).

FIG. 66B shows an example of a special icon, and one type of “?” Is shown as an example of the special icon. The special icon "?" Is displayed as an icon such as "?" When the icon is acquired, and one of the above-mentioned "gimmick operation", "button PUSH", or "color UP" icon is released when the icon is released. It has become.
After the icon is released, the description is omitted because it is the same as in FIG. 66 (a), but the special icon "?" Is "single target" when the "gimmick operation" is released when the icon is released. Yes, if the "button PUSH" is released when the icon is released, it is a "single target" (when viewed only in the release response effect), and is a "multiple target" (when viewed including the post-release response effect). If "Color UP" is released when the icon is released, it becomes "multiple targets".
In this way, by providing an icon that cannot even recognize the effect corresponding to the release when the icon is acquired, it is possible to give the player fun such as what will appear when the icon is released.

Although not particularly shown, a plurality of types of special icon display modes may be provided. For example, in the variable effect pattern when the jackpot lottery result is a big hit with a normal color special icon and a red special icon, a red special icon is displayed as compared with the variable effect pattern in the case of loss ( It may be easier to determine).
As a result, although it is not possible to recognize the effect corresponding to the release when the icon is acquired, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be recognized, so that the effect of the effect can be further improved.

It should be noted that the icon shown in FIG. 66B is designed so that the production content is not described such as "?", And it is not possible to grasp when the production content is executed.

FIG. 66 (c) shows different grouping of each icon. That is, if it is a "gimmick operation", it is a "single object" as described above, and since the effect corresponding to the release is clear, it is defined as "clear" when the icon is acquired.
On the other hand, if it is a special icon "?", It is defined as "unclear" when the icon is acquired because it cannot even recognize the effect corresponding to the release. When any of the icons is released from the special icon "?", The characteristics of the released icon will be followed. For example, if "gimmick operation" is released, it becomes "clear", and if "button PUSH" is released, it becomes "partially clear", which will be described later.
On the other hand, in the case of "button PUSH", as described above, if only the effect corresponding to the release is seen, it is a "single object" and the effect corresponding to the release is clear. On the other hand, if you look only at the post-release response effect, it is "multiple targets" and the post-release response effect is unclear. Due to this relationship, it is defined as "partially clear" when the icon is acquired.
Further, in the case of "color UP", as described above, it is "multiple objects", and although it is clear that the color change in some kind of production is performed, it is unclear what kind of production the color change is performed. Therefore, it is defined as "partially clear" when the icon is acquired.

Note that "partially clear" may be positioned as "clear" or "unclear" depending on the viewpoint.
That is, if it is "button PUSH", it can be said that it is "clear" from the viewpoint that it is possible to recognize that the effect button 35 is pressed at least in the effect corresponding to the release, and the effect generated by pressing the effect button 35 ( In other words, it can be said to be "unclear" from the viewpoint of not being able to recognize the response effect after release).
In addition, if it is "color UP", it can be said that it is "clear" from the viewpoint that it can be recognized that a color change in some kind of production is performed as a production corresponding to the release, and what kind of production color change is performed. It can be said that it is "unclear" from the viewpoint of being unrecognizable.
In this way, what is "partially clear" can be "clear" or "unclear" depending on the viewpoint.

As described above, in FIG. 66, the icon in the first stock effect in the present embodiment has been described, but other icons can be changed as appropriate.
For example, the icon may include only the normal icon shown in FIG. 66 (a) and may not include the special icon.
Further, the icon may be provided only with an icon similar to the "gimmick operation" shown in FIG. 66, may be provided only with an icon similar to the "button PUSH", or may be provided only with an icon similar to the "color UP". It may be provided, or a combination of any two of these may be provided.
Further, as the icon, only the special icon shown in FIG. 66 (b) may be displayed when the icon is acquired, and it may be notified which of the icons is shown in FIG. ..

(Example of the first stock production)
Next, an example of the first stock effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 71. Here, it is assumed that the variation effect pattern 31 is determined in the normal gaming state. In the image display device 31, only those necessary for the explanation of the first stock effect are described, and the description is omitted as appropriate (for example, the small effect symbol 48, etc.).

First, as shown in FIG. 67A, the effect symbol 38 is variablely displayed on the image display device 31, and the normal variation in the variable effect pattern 31 is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), an image such as "Press a button to acquire an icon!" Is displayed on the image display device 31 when the fluctuation is normally performed. That is, FIG. 67B is a rush screen of the first stock effect. Note that FIG. 67 (b) merely shows the entry screen of the first stock effect, for example, a telop such as an "icon acquisition zone" above and below the display area, or on the left and right sides. An image may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), the effect button 35 can be operated, and the image display device 31 displays an operation promotion image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 and an image of "press!". .. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (d), it is notified that the icon acquisition image KG (here, the “gimmick operation” icon) in the first stock effect has been acquired with the operation of the effect button 35 or the lapse of the operation valid period. The image to be displayed is displayed. In this way, one icon is acquired with one acquisition opportunity (for example, one operation of the effect button 35).

Although the operation promotion image SG that displays the entry screen of the first stock effect shown in FIG. 67 (b) and prompts the operation of the effect button 35 shown in FIG. 67 (c) is displayed, the icon is shown in FIG. 67 (d). You may set up a first stock production failure route (so-called stock) that cannot be acquired.
In addition, at the stage of displaying the rush screen of the first stock effect, whether or not the rush screen is displayed is performed, and if the rush screen is displayed, the first stock effect is executed, and if the rush screen is not displayed, The first stock effect may not be executed (so-called stock production is executed).
On the other hand, when the icon acquisition image KG in the first stock production is displayed in FIG. 67 (d) (when at least one icon is acquired), the first stock production failure route (so-called stock) is not provided thereafter. You may do so.
As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to whether or not the icon can be acquired in the scene of FIG. 67 (d).

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (e), the operation promotion image SG that prompts the operation of the effect button 35 is displayed again to encourage the acquisition of further icons. At this time, the already acquired icon image KG1 (here, the "gimmick operation" icon) is displayed on the image display device 31 (upper left) in a size smaller than that at the time of icon acquisition (FIG. 67 (d)). There is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (f), it is notified that the icon acquisition image KG (here, the "color UP" icon) in the first stock effect has been acquired with the operation of the effect button 35 or the lapse of the operation valid period. The image to be displayed is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (g), the operation promotion image SG for prompting the operation of the effect button 35 is displayed again to encourage the acquisition of further icons. At this time, in the display area (upper left) of the image display device 31, the already acquired icon images KG1 (here, the "gimmick operation" icon) and KG2 (here, the "color UP" icon) are displayed at the time of icon acquisition (here). It is displayed in a size smaller than that of FIGS. 67 (d) and 67 (f). By repeating such an effect a plurality of times, the icon in the first stock effect is acquired.
The examples shown in FIGS. 67 (c) and 67 (d) and (e) and (f) correspond to the "acquisition effect".

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (h), when the icon acquisition end condition in the first stock effect (when the number of icons acquired in the first stock effect reaches the upper limit (4)) is satisfied, the image is displayed. In the display area (upper side) of the device 31, four icon images of the acquired icon images KG1 to KG4 are displayed, and an image "completed!" Notifying that the icon acquisition of the first stock effect is completed is displayed. Will be done.

The maximum number of icons that can be acquired is not limited to four, and may be changed as appropriate. There may be no upper limit in the first place. Further, the upper limit number may be different depending on the variation effect pattern. For example, the SPSP reach variation effect pattern may have a larger upper limit than the SP reach variation effect pattern.
Further, the number of acquired icons may be linked to the number of pseudo-reams shown in FIG. For example, if the variation pattern is 4, one icon can be acquired, if the variation pattern is 7, two icons can be acquired, and if the variation pattern is 17, three icons can be acquired. With this configuration, it is possible to estimate the number of pseudo-reams from the number of acquired icons, which can be interesting.

The condition for ending the acquisition of the icon in the first stock production is not limited to the above. For example, it may be when the number of operations of the effect button 35 related to the acquisition of the icon of the first stock effect reaches the upper limit number (for example, 4 times), or when the normal fluctuation period ends.

Although not shown in FIG. 67, a plurality of icon acquisition image KGs of the same type may be acquired. For example, a plurality of "color UP" may be acquired. In such a case, the display mode of the icon acquisition image KG (“color UP” icon) may be as follows.
For example, when two "color UP" icons are acquired, the two icon acquisition image KG ("color UP" icon) is displayed.
For example, when two "color UP" icons are acquired, only one icon acquisition image KG ("color UP" icon) is displayed, and "x2" is displayed on the icon acquisition image KG ("color UP" icon). An image such as is additionally displayed.
Any of such display modes may be used.
In the former case, it can be seen that many icons have been acquired, and in the latter case, it is possible to prevent the display area from being occupied by displaying a plurality of icons.

In FIG. 67, the operation promotion image SG for prompting the operation of the effect button 35 is displayed, and the icon is acquired as the effect button 35 is operated or the operation valid period elapses. However, the operation promotion image SG is displayed. The icon may be acquired without displaying it and without operating the effect button 35 or elapse of the operation valid period. For example, an icon acquisition effect may be performed using a character image, and an icon may be added as a result of the effect.

Then, when the acquisition of the icon for the first stock effect is completed, the normal reach is displayed on the image display device 31 as shown in FIG. 68 (i). That is, in the icon acquisition example of FIG. 67, the icon is acquired by short-term concentration in a normal fluctuation period. As a result, the expectation that the jackpot game will be given can be increased at once.

The acquisition of the icon for the first stock effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 67, and may be acquired during the normal fluctuation period and the SP reach period, or may be acquired only during the SP reach period in a short-term concentration. You may. Further, in the normal fluctuation, the normal reach, and the SP reach, the first stock effect is displayed by displaying the entry screen of the first stock effect shown in FIG. 67 (b) before the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed after the loss is notified. May be started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (j), an image notifying that the normal reach has been lost (the effect symbol 38 is temporarily stopped at “343”) is displayed, and then as shown in FIG. 68 (k). , Suggest what icon to emit. In the suggestion, for example, the icon image is moved from the display position of the acquired icon image shown in FIG. 68 (j) and emitted in a size larger than the display size displayed as the acquired icon. Is displayed. At the same time, an image such as "release!" Is displayed. In FIG. 68 (k), the icon emission image HG (here, the “gimmick operation” icon KG1) is emitted and displayed. By making such a suggestion, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the icon to be released from now on.

In the stock effect, the icon is acquired based on the effect composition of the determined variable effect pattern, the determined jackpot notice effect, and the determined icon change effect (see FIG. 47). The release is not shown in the flowchart or the like, but is realized as follows, for example.
For example, the sub CPU 120a can recognize in advance the time (number of display frames) at which the emission corresponding effect is executed based on the determined variation effect pattern.
For example, in the variation effect pattern 8, the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) moves downward when "20 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the variation (β frame in terms of the number of display frames from the start of the variation effect). It is recognizable when (falling).
Then, the sub CPU 120a sets the time (number of display frames) immediately before the time when the effect corresponding to the emission is executed as the emission timing of the icon.
For example, in the case of the variation effect pattern 8, the time when "15 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the variation (the αth frame in terms of the number of display frames from the start of the variation effect) is set as the icon emission timing. As a result, the release effect of the "gimmick operation" icon can be executed immediately before the first decorative member 33a (effecting object) moves (falls) downward.
That is, in the example of the variation effect pattern 8, when "15 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the variation (the αth frame in terms of the number of display frames from the start of the variation effect), "the predetermined emission condition is satisfied. Corresponds to "establishment".

After the icon emission is started in FIG. 68 (k), no new icon is acquired. That is, the icon acquisition part is executed, and then the icon emission part is executed, and these parts are not mixed. As a result, only acquisition is performed in the acquisition part, and only release is performed in the release part, so that the effect can be easily understood by the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (l), the first decorative member 33a (effecting object) moves (falls) downward (that is, "development effect" is executed), and at the time of emission in the emitted icon described above. Perform the corresponding effect. Then, it is informed that the variable effect is still continued by the effect. It should be noted that the time from displaying the emission icon in FIG. 68 (k) to performing the emission response effect in FIG. 68 (l) is, for example, about 2S, so that a large time lag does not occur. .. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect is executed by releasing the icon, and that the released icon and the executed effect are linked.
Further, since the release response effect is executed in FIG. 68 (l) after suggesting what icon is to be emitted in FIG. 68 (k), the suggestion makes it easy for a player who is unfamiliar with the game to understand. It can be a production.

It should be noted that the time from displaying the icon to be emitted until the corresponding effect at the time of emission is performed may be different for each icon and the corresponding effect within a range in which a large time lag does not occur. For example, the time from when the "gimmick operation" icon is released until the first decorative member 33a (effecting object) starts moving (falling) downward, and after the "button PUSH" icon is released, the effect button 35 The latter may take longer when compared with the time until the operation becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the characteristics of the corresponding effect (for example, the characteristic that the introduction effect is accompanied when the effect button 35 is operated) is impaired.

Then, after the first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) returns to the original position, the SP reach title image SRG indicating that the first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) has shifted to the SP reach is displayed as shown in FIG. 68 (m). This SP reach title image SRG constitutes the title advance notice effect described above, and in the example of FIG. 68 (m), it is shown that it is displayed in the “normal color” in FIG. 43 (a).

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (n), it is suggested what icon is emitted. In FIG. 68 (n), the icon emission image HG (here, “color UP icon KG2”) is emitted and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 68 (m) and 68 (n), the icon of the "gimmick operation icon KG1" is deleted because the effect corresponding to the release has already been executed in FIG. 68 (l).
It is not necessary to delete the executed icon. For example, it may be displayed in a lighter color than the icon that is not emitted.
Erasing executed icons has the advantage of making the remaining emitted icons visually easier to understand, and history if the executed icons are displayed in a lighter color than the unreleased icons without being erased. There are advantages such as making it easier to understand.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (o), the color of the SP reach title image SRG is changed. That is, the above-mentioned effect corresponding to the release of the released icon is executed. Here, it is shown that it is displayed in "blue" in FIG. 43 (a). It should be noted that the time from displaying the emission icon in FIG. 68 (n) to performing the emission response effect in FIG. 68 (o) is, for example, about 2S, so that a large time lag does not occur. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (p), the SP reach title image SRG is erased, and the confrontation effect in the SP reach is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 68 (o) and 68 (p), the icon of the "color UP icon KG2" is also deleted because the effect corresponding to the release has already been executed in FIG. 68 (n).

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (q), it is suggested what icon is emitted. Here, it is suggested which of the "gimmick operation icon", the "button PUSH icon", and the "color UP icon" appears from the "? Icon KG3". Therefore, the suggestion includes the suggestion described in FIGS. 68 (k) and (n) and the suggestion that any icon appears from the "? Icon KG3" as shown in FIG. 69 (q). In particular, in the suggestion that one of the icons appears from "? Icon KG3", the player is made to recognize which icon is to be released by making the suggestion, and then the effect corresponding to the release is executed. It makes sense to carry out the suggestions. In FIG. 69 (q), the icon emission image HG (here, “? Icon KG3” to “button PUSH icon HG”) is emitted and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (r), the operation promotion image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 and the image "press!" Are displayed on the image display device 31 as the effect corresponding to the release of the emitted icon (button PUSH icon). Is displayed in.

Then, when the effect button 35 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 69 (s), the above-mentioned post-release corresponding effect on the emitted icon is executed. Note that FIG. 69 (s) shows that the cut-in effect was executed (the cut-in image CI was displayed) as the post-release response effect. In the example of FIG. 69 (s), it is shown that it is displayed in "red" in FIG. 43 (b).

In the example of the cut-in effect of FIG. 69, the cut-in effect is executed when the effect button 35 is operated by the player, but the cut-in effect may be executed even if the effect button 35 is not operated. However, the cut-in effect may not be executed if the effect button 35 is not operated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (t), it is suggested what icon is emitted. In FIG. 69 (t), the icon emission image HG (here, “button PUSH icon KG4”) is emitted and displayed.
As shown in FIG. 69 (t), in the first stock effect, all the acquired icons are released in the acquired variable effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (u), an introduction effect in which an image imitating the effect button 35 is gradually displayed is executed. In the introduction effect, the operation validity period of the effect button 35 is not set.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (v), the operation promotion image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 and the image "press!" Are displayed on the image display device 31 as the effect corresponding to the release of the emitted icon (button PUSH icon). Is displayed in.

Then, when the effect button 35 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 69 (w), the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) is used as a post-release corresponding effect in the released icon (button PUSH icon). It moves (falls) downward (that is, executes "decision effect 1" at the time of big hit), temporarily stops the effect symbol 38 at "333", and notifies that the big hit lottery result is a big hit.
Note that FIG. 69 (w) constitutes the decision effect 1 executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot.

Then, after the first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) returns to the original position, as shown in FIG. 69 (x), the directing symbol 38 is temporarily stopped at "333" at a size larger than that of FIG. 69 (w). And notify that the jackpot lottery result was a jackpot.

In the example of the determined effect 1 in FIG. 69, it is assumed that the determined effect 1 is executed when the effect button 35 is operated by the player, but in the case of the determined effect 1, unlike the cut-in effect described above, the effect button is executed. Determining effect 1 is always executed depending on the operation of 35 or the elapse of the operation valid period.
That is, when the "button PUSH icon" is released, there is a case where the corresponding effect is not executed after the release unless the effect button 35 is operated (for example, a cut-in effect), and after the effect is released regardless of whether the effect button 35 is operated or not. It is possible to construct a case where the corresponding effect is executed (for example, the determined effect 1).

The examples shown in FIGS. 68 (k) and 68 (n) and 69 (q) and (t) correspond to the "release effect", and the effect corresponding to the release in FIGS. 68 (l) and (o) and the effect corresponding to the release in FIGS. 68 (l) and (o). The post-emission response effects of FIGS. 69 (s) and 69 (w) correspond to "predetermined effects".

FIG. 70 shows another production example. 70 (a) and 70 (b) are production examples showing that the "color UP icon" is emitted to indicate that the variable icon color change has occurred. In FIG. 70 (a), the above-mentioned example is used. Similarly, the icon is released and displayed (here, the "color UP icon HG" is released and displayed). Further, in FIG. 70A, it is shown that the variable icon of "green" is displayed in the variable icon display area 31c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70B, the variation icon color change is completed when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 31c changes from “green” to “red”. It should be noted that the time from displaying the emission icon in FIG. 70 (a) to performing the emission response effect in FIG. 70 (b) is, for example, about 2S, so that a large time lag does not occur. ..

70 (v-1), (w-1), and (x-1) are different from the case of the jackpot described in FIGS. 69 (v), (w), and (x), and the case where the jackpot lottery result is lost. Shows an example of the production of. In particular, in FIG. 70 (w-1), as a post-release response effect for the emitted icon (button PUSH icon), an image SMG that imitates smoke is displayed without operating the first decorative member 33a (effecting object). It is displayed, and the effect symbol 38 is temporarily stopped at "323" to notify that the jackpot lottery result is a loss. That is, FIG. 70 (w-1) constitutes a decision effect 1 executed when the jackpot lottery result is a loss.

71 (c-1) and (d-1) show, for example, another example at the time of icon acquisition shown in FIGS. 67 (c) and 67 (d), and FIGS. 71 (k), (l), and (d). In n) and (o), (k), (l), (n), and (o) of FIG. 68 are quoted as they are, and an example of the effect at the time of icon emission is shown.
That is, as shown in FIGS. 67 (c) and 67 (d), in addition to the case where one icon is acquired at the opportunity of acquiring 1 (for example, by one operation of the effect button 35), FIG. 71 (c) As shown in -1) and (d-1), a plurality of acquisitions may be acquired at the opportunity of acquiring 1 (for example, by one operation of the effect button 35).
The term "plurality" as used herein may mean a plurality of icons of the same type (for example, two color UPs) or a plurality of different types of icons (for example, gimmick operation and color UP).
Depending on the type of icon, a plurality of icons can be acquired with one acquisition trigger (for example, one operation of the effect button 35) and one with one acquisition trigger (for example, one operation of the effect button 35). There may be some that cannot be acquired (by operation). For example, a plurality of color UP icons may be acquired when one is acquired, and a plurality of gimmick operation icons may not be acquired when one is acquired.
On the other hand, when the icons are released, as shown in (k), (l), (n), and (o), a plurality of icons are not released at the same time, but are released one by one, and the released icons are released. The next icon can be released after the release response effect and the post-release response effect are completed.
With this configuration, when an icon is acquired, a plurality of icons may be acquired at the same time with one acquisition opportunity, so that the player can be given a feeling of acquisition.
On the other hand, when the icons are released, they are released one by one, and after the release response effect and the post-release response effect of the released icons are completed, the next icon can be released, so the released icons are released. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize what kind of effect the time-responsive effect and the post-release response effect were.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost by releasing a plurality of acquired icons at the same time.

Not limited to the above, it may be configured only when one icon is acquired at the opportunity of 1 acquisition, or it may be configured only when a plurality of icons are acquired at the opportunity of 1 acquisition. At the time of release, a plurality of may be released at the same time.

Further, in FIGS. 68 and 69, as an example, the icons acquired first are released in order, but they may be released at random. For example, the last acquired icon may be released first. As a result, unexpectedness can be imparted.

In addition, when a plurality of icons are acquired, it is not necessary to release all of them by the end of the variation effect. That is, the variation effect may be terminated with the unreleased icon.
In addition, the expected release degree may be additionally displayed for each icon. For example, a numerical value indicating the expected emission degree may be additionally displayed, the expected emission degree may be expressed by the color of the icon (for example, gold, red, green, blue), or a plurality of types of character images (for example, for example). The release expectation may be expressed by additionally displaying any character image from (excellent, good, acceptable, etc.). Then, an icon having a low numerical value indicating the release expectation, a color having a low release expectation, or an icon additionally displayed with a character image having a low release expectation may be unreleased.
If all the acquired icons are released, it is assumed that a skilled player will be able to predict what kind of effect will be performed. For example, multiple types of icons are acquired and not released. If this is the case, it becomes difficult for even a skilled player to predict what kind of production will be performed, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, although the icon is emitted, the effect corresponding to the release may not be executed. For example, although the "button PUSH icon" is released, the operation promotion image SG may not be displayed and the operation validity period of the effect button 35 may not be set.
Further, the first stock effect may be executed at the same time as the timer effect described above, or may not be executed at the same time as the timer effect.

(Figure explaining the icon in the second stock production)
Next, an example of the icon in the second stock effect will be described with reference to FIG. 72.
Since the basic configuration of the figure (at the time of icon acquisition, etc.) is the same as that of FIG. 66, the description of the basic configuration will be omitted.

First, FIG. 72A shows an example of a normal icon, and shows two types of the normal icon, "single button hit" and "continuous button hit".
The "single button press" indicates that an operation promotion effect that urges the player to press the effect button 35 (once) occurs, and the player who has acquired the icon marked "single button press" It can be recognized in advance that an effect of pressing (single hit) the effect button 35 will occur as an effect corresponding to the release.
Here, the icon described as "button single hit" is the same as the icon described as "button PUSH" described in FIG. 66 in terms of the release response effect. However, since each is used in a different stock effect, the icon described as "button PUSH" is displayed in the first stock effect, and the icon described as "button single hit" is displayed in the second stock effect. .. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize from the icon which stock effect is being executed (and which game state is being played).
Not limited to this, since the second stock effect is an effect that can be executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, for example, the number of games played in the high-probability time-saving game state is 1 to 39 times (for example, the first effect mode). , The icon marked "single button hit" is displayed, and the number of games played 40 to 80 times in the high-probability time-saving game state (for example, the second production mode) is the icon marked "button once". May be displayed so that the display mode of the icon is different even in the same high-probability time-saving game state. With this configuration, it is possible to grasp how much the high-probability time-saving gaming state is being played from the display mode of the icon.
In addition, "button single hit" corresponds to "pressing (single hit) effect generation of effect button 35" as a corresponding effect at the time of release, and "tempai effect generation" and "decision effect 2 generation" correspond to post-release corresponding effect. doing. That is, as shown in "Remarks", the response effect at the time of release is "single target", and the response effect after release is "multiple targets".

The "button repeated hits" indicates that an operation promotion effect for urging the player to press (continuously hit) the effect button 35 is generated, and the player who has acquired the icon marked "button repeated hits" It is possible to recognize in advance that an effect of pressing (continuously hitting) the effect button 35 will occur as an effect corresponding to the release.
In addition, "button repeated hits" corresponds to "pressing (continuous hitting) effect generation of effect button 35" as a corresponding effect at the time of release, and "tempai effect generation" and "decision effect 2 generation" correspond to post-release corresponding effects. doing. That is, as shown in "Remarks", the response effect at the time of release is "single target", and the response effect after release is "multiple targets".

Since such "button single hit icon" and "button repeated hit icon" are also positioned in the same manner as the "button PUSH icon" in the first stock production, they are "partially clear" as shown in FIG. 72 (b). It is stipulated as an icon. Of course, like the "button PUSH icon" in the first stock production, it may be regarded as "clear" or "unclear".

In the second stock production, only two types of icons are shown for convenience of explanation, but a plurality of types of icons may be further provided, and there may be a "clear" one such as the first stock production. However, there may be something "unclear".

(Example of the second stock production)
Next, an example of the second stock effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. That is, FIGS. 73 to 76 show a display mode of the image display device 31 in a high-probability time-saving gaming state in which the second stock effect can be executed. In the image display device 31, only those necessary for the explanation of the second stock effect are described, and the description is omitted as appropriate (for example, the small effect symbol 48, etc.).

It is assumed that the variation effect pattern 51 is determined in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (d), and that the variation effect pattern 51 is also determined in FIGS. 73 (e) to 73 (h).
First, as shown in FIG. 73A, the effect symbol 38 is variablely displayed on the image display device 31, and the normal variation in the variable effect pattern 51 is performed. Since the game is in a high-probability time-saving game state, a right-handed promotion image MG that encourages right-handed hitting is displayed, and a plurality of hold icons are displayed in the second hold icon display area 31b.
Although not particularly shown in FIG. 73, the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 31c and the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 31b are the variable icon or hold in the normal gaming state. The display mode is different from the icon. It is assumed that the display mode is different, for example, the shape is the same but the color is different, or the shape itself is different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73B, an operation promotion image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 is displayed on the image display device 31 when the normal fluctuation is performed. Then, an image notifying that the icon acquisition image KG (here, “button single hit icon”) in the second stock effect has been acquired with the operation of the effect button 35 or the lapse of the operation valid period is displayed (FIG. 73 (FIG. 73). c) See).

Further, in the second stock production, when the icon acquisition image KG is displayed, the icon acquisition sound is also output. If it is a "single button button icon", a sound such as "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 32. If it is a "button repeated hit icon", a sound such as "Kakeen ♪" is output from the voice output device 32 (see FIG. 73 (g)), and any icon can be used depending on the output sound. It is possible to grasp whether it has been acquired.
The reason why different acquisition sounds are output depending on the icon in this way is that in the high-probability time-saving game state in which the second stock effect is performed, the game ball is passing through the normal symbol gate 13 in addition to the starting opening winning. It is also necessary to pay attention to the above, and the time for continuously gazing at the image display device 31 tends to be shorter than in the normal gaming state. Therefore, by outputting different acquisition sounds depending on the icons as shown in FIG. 73, it is possible to grasp what kind of icon has been acquired even if the player's viewpoint is away from the image display device 31. is there.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (d), the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern 51 is completed, and the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed. Even if the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed, the "button single hit icon KG1" acquired in FIG. 73 (c) is not erased and is continuously displayed in the display area (upper left) of the image display device 31. There is. That is, the acquired icons are carried over to FIG. 73 (e) and thereafter, and in the example of FIG. 73, the icons are acquired in a pattern in which a plurality of variations are performed using the pre-determination table.

Of course, also in the second stock production, the icon may be acquired in a short-term concentration as shown in FIG. 67.
Further, the icon may be acquired only in the first stock production in a short-term concentration, or the icon may be acquired only in the second stock production in a short-term concentration.
Further, also in the second stock effect, a plurality of items may be acquired at the opportunity of acquiring 1 (for example, by operating the effect button 35 once).
Also, in the second stock effect, depending on the type of icon, a plurality of icons can be acquired with one acquisition opportunity (for example, one operation of the effect button 35) and one acquisition opportunity (for example, for example). There may be some that cannot be acquired (by one operation of the effect button 35). For example, a plurality of single button hit icons may be acquired when one is acquired, and a plurality of button continuous hit icons may not be acquired when one is acquired.

Further, in the second stock effect, one button repeated hit icon and a plurality of button single hit icons may be acquired at the opportunity of acquiring one (for example, one operation of the effect button 35).
Further, in the second stock effect, the number of icons that can be acquired with one acquisition trigger (for example, one operation of the effect button 35) may be larger or smaller than that of the first stock effect. ..
Further, in the second stock effect, the icon may be acquired even when the effect symbol 38 is temporarily stopped or when the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed.
Further, in the second stock effect, when the icon is not used and the game shifts to the jackpot game, the unused icon may be used in the variable effect after the end of the jackpot.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (e), the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern 51 is newly started, and in FIG. 73 (f), the effect button 35 is displayed on the image display device 31 as in FIG. 73 (b). The operation promotion image SG that prompts the operation of is displayed. Then, an image notifying that the icon acquisition image KG (here, “button repeated hit icon”) in the second stock effect has been acquired with the operation of the effect button 35 or the lapse of the operation valid period is displayed (FIG. 73 (FIG. 73). g) See).
As described above, in FIG. 73 (g), a sound such as “Kakeen ♪”, which is an acquired sound for notifying that the “button repeated hit icon” has been acquired, is output from the voice output device 32.
In addition, if it is a "button repeated hit icon", an acquired sound such as "Kakeen ♪" is output, and if it is a "button single hit icon", an acquired sound such as "pon ♪" is output. If it is an "icon", the acquired sound such as "Kakeen ♪" is output, and if it is a "button single hit icon", the acquired sound does not have to be output (it may be silent).

Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (h), the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern 51 is completed, and the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed. Even if the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed, the "button single hit icon KG1" acquired in FIG. 73 (c) and the "button continuous hit icon KG2" acquired in FIG. 73 (g) are not erased and are displayed as images. It is continuously displayed in the display area (upper left) of the device 31.
The examples shown in FIGS. 73 (b) and 73 (c) and (f) and (g) correspond to the "acquisition effect".

Although not shown in FIG. 73, a plurality of icon acquisition image KGs of the same type may be acquired. For example, a plurality of "single button hits" may be acquired. In such a case, the display mode of the icon acquisition image KG (“button single hit” icon) may be as follows.
For example, when two "single button button" icons are acquired, the two icon acquisition image KG ("single button button" icon) is displayed.
For example, when two "button single hit" icons are acquired, only one icon acquisition image KG ("button single hit" icon) is displayed, and an image such as "x2" is additionally displayed on the icon acquisition image KG.
Any of such display modes may be used.
In the former case, it can be seen that many icons have been acquired, and in the latter case, it is possible to prevent the display area from being occupied by displaying a plurality of icons.

In FIG. 73, the operation promotion image SG that prompts the operation of the effect button 35 is displayed, and the icon is acquired as the effect button 35 is operated or the operation valid period elapses. However, the operation promotion image SG is displayed. The icon may be acquired without displaying it and without operating the effect button 35 or elapse of the operation valid period. For example, an icon acquisition effect may be performed using a character image, and an icon may be added as a result of the effect.

74 (i) to 74 (p) assume that the variation effect pattern 82 has been determined, and FIG. 74 (i) shows that the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern 82 has been started. In the display area (upper left) of the image display device 31, the "button single hit icon KG1" acquired in the variation effect two times before and the "button continuous hit icon KG2" acquired in the variation effect one time before continue. It is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (j), it is suggested what icon is emitted. In the suggestion, for example, the icon image is moved from the display position of the acquired icon image shown in FIG. 74 (i) and emitted in a size larger than the display size displayed as the acquired icon. Is displayed. At the same time, an image such as "release!" Is displayed. In FIG. 74 (j), the icon emission image HG (here, the “single button press” icon KG1) is emitted and displayed. In the second stock production, as in the first stock production, the acquisition part shown in FIG. 73 and the release part shown in FIG. 74 do not coexist, the acquisition part is executed, and then the release part is performed. It is supposed to run.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (k), a command image "Press the button to reach!" Is displayed, and the effect button 35 is operated as a release response effect for the released icon (button single hit icon). The operation promotion image SG and the image prompting the single hit of the effect button 35 "press!" Are displayed on the image display device 31.

Then, when the effect button 35 is operated (single hit) by the player, as shown in FIG. 74 (l), a tempai effect (successful tempai effect) is performed as a post-release response effect for the released icon (button single hit icon). It is executed, and the reach effect using the "3" symbol of the effect symbol 38 is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (m), SP reach is executed, and it is suggested what icon is emitted during SP reach execution (see FIG. 74 (n)). In FIG. 74 (n), the icon emission image HG (here, “button repeated hit icon KG2”) is emitted and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (o), a command image "Drop the gimmick by repeatedly hitting the button!" Is displayed, and as a response effect at the time of release of the released icon (button repeated hit icon), the effect button 35 The operation promotion image SG for prompting the operation and the image for prompting the continuous hitting of the effect button 35 "continuous hitting!" Are displayed on the image display device 31.

Then, when the effect button 35 is operated (continuously hit) by the player, as shown in FIG. 74 (p), as a post-release corresponding effect of the released icon (button repeated hit icon), the first decorative member 33a (directing role) The object) moves (falls) downward (that is, executes "decision effect 2 success"), temporarily stops the effect symbol 38 at "333", and notifies that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot.
Although not shown in particular, if the jackpot lottery result is lost, the first decorative member 33a (effect) is used as a post-release response effect for the released icon (button repeated hit icon) as in the first stock effect described above. An image SMG imitating smoke (see FIG. 70 (w-1)) was displayed without operating the accessory), the production symbol 38 was temporarily stopped at "323", and the jackpot lottery result was lost. Is notified. That is, "decision effect 2 failure" is executed.

The examples shown in FIGS. 74 (j) and 74 (n) correspond to the “release effect”, and the effect corresponding to the release of FIGS. 74 (k) and (o) and the release of FIGS. 74 (l) and (p). The post-response production corresponds to the "predetermined production".

FIG. 75 shows an example of the acquired icon change effect that can be executed in the second stock effect. Note that FIG. 75 will be described with an example of executing the acquired icon change effect in the scenes (i) and (j) of FIG. 74.

First, as shown in FIG. 75 (i-1), the mini character image mc is displayed in the display area (lower right) of the image display device 31. Then, an action (specifically, an effect of irradiating the button single hit icon KG2 from the mini character mc with a ray image) is executed for the "button single hit icon KG2" acquired from the mini character image mc.

Then, as a result of performing the effect, as shown in FIG. 75 (i-2), an image in which the "button single hit icon KG2" is changed to the "button continuous hit icon KG2" and an image such as "change!" Are displayed. , The audio output device 32 outputs the acquired sound "Kakeen ♪" that is output when the "button repeated hit icon" is acquired. From this, it can be grasped that the "button repeated hit icon" has been acquired.
As described above, since the jackpot expectation is single hit <continuous hit, the expectation that the player's jackpot game will be given by performing such an acquired icon change effect. Can be improved.
In addition, by performing such an acquired icon change effect, it becomes difficult to predict what kind of effect will be performed after the icon is acquired, so that further improvement in the effect of the effect can be expected.
Then, in FIGS. 75 (n) and 75 (o), the “button repeated hit icon” is emitted in the same manner as in FIGS. 74 (n) and 74 (o), and the effect corresponding to the release of the emitted icon is executed.

In addition, although FIGS. 75 (i-1) and 75 (i-2) show the success pattern of the acquired icon change effect, the failure pattern in which the "button single hit icon KG2" does not change in (i-2) is provided. You may.
Further, it may have a pattern that changes from a "button repeated hit icon" to a "button single hit icon".

FIG. 76 shows another example at the time of release in the second stock effect. (C), (d), (g), (h), and (i) of FIG. 76 are shown in FIGS. Since the same is true, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, in the scenes (j) and (k) of FIG. 74, the effects shown in FIGS. 76 (j-1) and (k-1) are performed.
That is, it is shown that the "button continuous hit icon KG2" acquired in FIG. 76 (g) is released before the "button single hit icon KG1" acquired in FIG. 76 (c). With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict what kind of production will be performed after the icon is acquired, so it is expected that the production will be further improved.

Next, the third stock effect, which is different from the above-mentioned second stock effect, will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78.
The third stock effect is a stock effect that can be executed in a high-probability time-saving game state, and is, for example, a stock effect that can be executed in place of or together with the second stock effect.
In addition, the upper limit of the number of icons acquired in the third stock production is "4".
Further, the third stock effect has a case where one icon can be acquired and a case where a plurality of icons can be acquired with one acquisition trigger (for example, one operation of the effect button 35).
It should be noted that the acquisition opportunity is generated a total of four times, and when the icon is acquired, the effect button 35 is operated a total of four times to acquire the icon. In addition, even if the number of acquired icons reaches the upper limit of "4", if the acquisition opportunity does not reach "4" times, the icon acquisition is performed until the acquisition opportunity reaches "4" times. It will be.
The details will be described below.

First, in FIG. 77 (a), an image such as "Press a button to acquire an icon!" Is displayed on the image display device 31 when the fluctuation is normally performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the effect button 35 can be operated, and the image display device 31 displays an operation promotion image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 and an image of "press!". ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the icon acquisition image KG1 (here, the “gimmick operation” icon) and the icon acquisition image KG2 (here, the “gimmick operation” icon) in the third stock effect are obtained as the effect button 35 is operated or the operation valid period elapses. Here, an image notifying that the "color UP" icon) has been acquired is displayed.
That is, in the example of FIG. 77 (c), it is shown that a plurality of icons are acquired at the same time (for example, by one operation of the effect button 35) with one acquisition trigger.

Then, after FIG. 77 (c), the effect shown in FIG. 77 (b) is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 77 (d), the icon acquisition image KG3 (here, the “color UP” icon) in the third stock effect is performed. ), Icon acquisition image An image notifying that the KG4 (here, the "button PUSH" icon) has been acquired is displayed.
That is, in the example of FIG. 77 (d), it is shown that a plurality of icons are acquired at the same time with one acquisition trigger (for example, by one operation of the effect button 35).
At this point, the acquisition opportunity has occurred "2" times, and although it has not reached "4" times, the icon has reached the maximum acquisition number of "4". Therefore, thereafter, the effect shown in FIG. 77 (b) is performed again twice.

That is, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), although the icon acquisition images KG1 to KG4 are displayed, the effect button 35 can be operated, and the image display device 31 is an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the effect button 35. The SG and the image "Press!" Are displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (f), it is notified that the icon acquisition image KG5 (here, the "gimmick operation" icon) in the third stock effect has been acquired with the operation of the effect button 35 or the lapse of the operation valid period. The image to be displayed is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (g), although the icon acquisition images KG1 to KG4 and the icon acquisition images KG5 are displayed, the effect button 35 can be operated, and the effect button 35 is displayed on the image display device 31. The operation promotion image SG that prompts the operation and the image "Press!" Are displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (h), it is notified that the icon acquisition image KG6 (here, the “color UP” icon) in the third stock effect has been acquired with the operation of the effect button 35 or the lapse of the operation valid period. The image to be displayed is displayed.
The "acquisition effect", "suggestion", "release effect", and "predetermined effect" are positioned in the same manner as the above-mentioned second stock effect.

That is, even if the acquired icons reach the upper limit of the number of icons, if the acquisition opportunity remains, the acquisition opportunity is generated, and the icon acquired by the generated acquisition opportunity is also displayed on the image display device 31. (KG5, KG6 in the example of FIG. 77). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort or giving a feeling of loss.

Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (i), the icon release image HG (here, “button PUSH icon KG4”) after releasing KG1 to KG3 is released and displayed. In addition, KG5 and KG6 have not been released yet.

Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (j), the introduction effect is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 78 (k), the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "decision effect 2 failure" is executed. That is, it informs that the jackpot lottery result was a loss. Then, after the effect symbol 38 is temporarily stopped at "323" in FIG. 78 (l), the stop display is displayed in FIG. 78 (m). Then, after that, the next variation effect shown in FIG. 78 (n) is started.
The icon acquisition images KG5 and KG6, which have not been released, are displayed from FIGS. 78 (i) to 78 (l), but are deleted when the icon acquisition images KG5 and KG6 are stopped and displayed (end the variation effect) in FIG. 78 (m). To. That is, it will be erased without being released.

As described above, in the third stock production, even if the acquisition icon reaches the upper limit, if the acquisition opportunity remains and the acquisition opportunity occurs, the icon is further given to the player. On the other hand, the icon given after reaching the upper limit is not released. That is, after reaching the upper limit, only the appearance icon is given.
As a result, although the icon given after reaching the upper limit is not released, the icon itself is given, so that the player can be given a certain degree of satisfaction when the icon is acquired.

(About the comparison between timer production and stock production)
Here, the above-mentioned timer effect and the above-mentioned stock effect (for example, the first stock effect) are compared. That is, in the first stock effect, the acquisition part and the release part are not mixed, and for example, a new icon is not acquired while the release part is being executed.
On the other hand, the timer effect is, for example, in FIG. 59 (b), the SP reach generation timer effect is started from the standby display between T2 and T4 or does not go through the standby display and ends at T4. explained. That is, in T2 to T4 of FIG. 59 (b), the standby display related to the SP reach generation timer effect may be started while the icon change timer is being executed. That is, in the example of FIG. 59B, it can be said that a new timer effect (SP reach generation timer effect) is stocked after the execution of the icon change timer is started.
Therefore, when the release part is executed in the first stock effect (when at least one icon is released), the stock of the icon does not increase, but in the timer effect, when the timer effect of 1 is executed, the stock of the timer effect increases. The result is a comparison that there is something to do. By providing each of these different effects, it is possible to further improve the interest of the effect. Specifically, as described in the description of the "timer icon", the timer effect shows that the timer time is being subtracted from the "timer icon", and it is "0 seconds left". You can recognize when the production will be performed later.
On the other hand, since the end time of the timer production itself can be grasped, some players may have a disappointing feeling that the timer production will end (concern).
Therefore, as described in the example of FIG. 59 (b), the above-mentioned concern can be resolved by enabling the execution of a new timer effect even after the timer effect is executed.
On the other hand, in the stock effect, as described in FIG. 66, the execution time of the effect cannot be recognized from the icon. Therefore, since the end time of the stock production cannot be clearly grasped, the above-mentioned concern itself is unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is said that no new icon will be acquired while executing the release part.
In this way, whether or not a new icon is added is determined according to the characteristics of the "timer effect" and the "stock effect", which can be said to lead to further improvement of the effect of the effect.

Further, in the stock effect (for example, the first stock effect), as described in FIGS. 68 and 69, for example, in the release effect, after suggesting the effect content of the effect corresponding to the release to be executed thereafter, at the time of release. Moved to the execution of the corresponding production.
On the other hand, in the timer effect, for example, as described in FIG. 62 (d), after displaying only the abstract "GO !!" from the display of "0 seconds left", the variable icon change effect is performed. I tried to execute it. That is, although it is suggested that some kind of effect is started, the specific effect content (in the example of FIG. 62 (d), the variable icon change effect) is not suggested, and the execution of the variable icon change effect is started. did.
With this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to recognize in advance what kind of effect will be executed in the future (stock effect) and cases where it is not possible to recognize in advance what kind of effect will be executed in the future (timer effect). Since it can be constructed, it is possible to further improve the entertainment of the production by producing a variety of productions.

The first stock effect, the second stock effect, and the third stock effect have been described above, but the above description is only an example, and may be configured as follows, for example.

In the above description, the acquired icon image is displayed on the image display device 31.
Not limited to this, when a display device different from the image display device 31 (so-called “sub-liquid crystal” or the like) is provided, the acquired icon may be displayed on another display device. With this configuration, it is not necessary to reduce or hide the display content of the image display device 31 by displaying the acquisition icon, so that deterioration of visibility can be prevented.

Further, when the other display device is provided, the effect related to the acquisition of the icon (for example, the display of the operation promotion image SG) and the effect related to the release of the icon (for example, the display of the icon emission image HG) are images. It may be performed by the display device 31, and the unreleased icon may be displayed by another display device. With this configuration, since the image display device 31 is used in the main scenes (acquisition scene, release scene), it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the main scene.

In the above description, the acquired icon image is displayed on the image display device 31.
Not limited to this, the acquisition may be notified by a directing accessory (for example, such as the first decorative member 33a) and an LED provided in the directing accessory. For example, as in the character images A to D described above, the effectors A to D are provided, and LEDs are mounted on each of the effectors. Then, when the "gimmick operation" is acquired, the LED of the production accessory A or the production accessory D is turned on from non-lighting, and when the "button PUSH" is acquired, the LED of the production accessory B or the production accessory D is turned on. When the LED is turned on from non-lighting and the "color UP" is acquired, the acquisition is expressed by turning on the LED of the effecting object B or the effecting object D from non-lighting. With this configuration, it is not necessary to reduce or hide the display content of the image display device 31 by displaying the acquisition icon, so that deterioration of visibility can be prevented.

Further, when the acquisition is expressed by the above-mentioned effect and LED, the effect related to the acquisition (for example, the display of the operation promotion image SG) and the effect related to the release (for example, the display of the icon emission image HG) are displayed as images. It may be performed by the device 31, and the expression of the unreleased object may be performed by the effector and the LED. With this configuration, since the image display device 31 is used in the main scenes (acquisition scene, release scene), it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the main scene.

In addition, the acquisition may be expressed simply by the directing character. For example, if the directors A to D are provided and the "gimmick operation" is acquired, the director A is moved from the first position to the second position, and if the "button PUSH" is acquired, the director When the object B is moved from the first position to the second position and the "color UP" is acquired, the effecting object C is moved from the first position to the second position, and the effecting object D is the first. When moving from the position of to the second position, the acquisition may be expressed by configuring such that it corresponds to any of "gimmick operation", "button PUSH", and "color UP". With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the acquisition status than to express the acquisition with a display object.

Further, the acquisition may be expressed by the sound output from the voice output device 32. When expressing acquisition by sound, for example, the music to be output may be changed according to the number of acquired icons, or the music to be output only when the icon of "gimmick operation" is possessed. There may be. With this configuration, it is possible to give auditory enjoyment depending on the acquisition status of the icon.

In the above explanation, the acquired icons are displayed.
Not limited to this, the icon may not be displayed and may be simply displayed as a number. For example, if the acquisition is 4, four icons are displayed if it is an icon, but if it is a number, it may be simply displayed as 4, and then the number may be subtracted according to the release. With this configuration, the display area used can be reduced.

In the above explanation, it is displayed as an acquired icon image.
Not limited to this, the acquired character image may be displayed. For example, the character image A corresponds to "gimmick operation", the character image B corresponds to "button PUSH", the character image C corresponds to "color UP", and the character image D corresponds to "gimmick operation" and "button PUSH". , "Color UP" may be supported. In this case, it is not necessary to clearly indicate the effect content to each character. For example, the character A image may not have "gimmick operation". With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which character image is acquired. Further, by repeating the game, it is possible to grasp which character corresponds to which effect (for example, "gimmick operation"), so that the operation of the game machine 1 can be prolonged.

Further, when displaying the acquired character image, there may be an effect common to a plurality of characters. For example, the character image A corresponds to the "gimmick operation" and the "color UP", and the character image C corresponds to the "button PUSH" and the "color UP" so that the character image A is acquired and the character image A is acquired. The "color UP" may be executed depending on the case where the image C is acquired. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict the effect to be executed as compared with the case where the character image and the corresponding effect are 1: 1.

Further, when displaying the acquired character image, the acquisition may be indirectly expressed by displaying the item image related to the character image. For example, character image A is related to "item image imitating a sword", character image B is related to "item image imitating a gun", and character image C is related to "item image imitating a spear". Assuming that the character image D is related to the "item image imitating a bow", the character image A corresponds to the "gimmick operation", the character image B corresponds to the "button PUSH", and the character image C corresponds to the "button PUSH". Assuming that the character image D corresponds to "color UP" and corresponds to "gimmick operation", "button PUSH", and "color UP", for example, when "gimmick operation" is acquired, "item image imitating a sword". , Or "item image imitating a bow" may be given. In this case as well, it is not necessary to clearly indicate the effect content in each item image. With this configuration, by repeating the game, the relationship between the item image, the character image, and the effect content can be found, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the above explanation, the icon acquisition part is executed, and then the icon emission part is executed, and these parts are not mixed.
Not limited to this, the icon acquisition part and the icon emission part may be mixed. For example, you may get a new icon while running the release part. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to rescue a player who is discouraged because there are few acquisition icons in the acquisition part.

In the above explanation, the acquired icon image is displayed and the emitted icon is deleted. In particular, it did not display any additional display on the acquired icon image.
Not limited to this, some additional display may be performed on the acquired icon image. For example, an additional indication such as "Standby" suggesting that it will be released may be added. With this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the icon with the additional display "Standby" will be released in the future.

In the above description, when the icon is acquired by a plurality of fluctuations using the pre-determination table, the acquired icon image is displayed in the display area (upper side) of the image display device 31.
Not limited to this, the acquired icon image may be additionally displayed in a small size on the hold icon corresponding to the variable effect in which the icon is emitted.
When additionally displaying the hold icon, the display area is limited due to the existence of the adjacent hold icon or the like. Therefore, a simple additional display such as "stock x 4" may be used. With this configuration, by checking the additionally displayed hold icon, it is possible to easily understand which variation effect the icon is released from.

In addition, it may be suggested in advance that the stock effect is performed by the hold icon itself. For example, in addition to the icons described in FIGS. 34 and 35, an icon such as "stock" may be provided, and the icon such as "stock" may be displayed from the stage of prior variation in FIG. 35. Then, when the icon such as "stock" becomes the fluctuation, the acquisition effect described with reference to FIG. 67 or the like may be performed without fail or with a high probability. With this configuration, it is possible to expect that a jackpot game will be given when an icon such as "stock" is displayed as a hold icon because the stock effect is easily executed at the time of a jackpot. it can.

In the above description, the icons acquired and released in the stock effect are those shown in FIGS. 66 and 72 and those described in the explanations in FIGS. 66 and 72.
Not limited to this, it may have a character icon. For example, if the character icons A to D are acquired and released, the jackpot notice effect and the reach effect corresponding to the character A described in the character icon A are executed, and the character icon B is acquired and released. Then, the jackpot notice effect and the reach effect corresponding to the character B marked on the character icon B may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make people more interested in what kind of icon can be acquired at the time of icon acquisition.

In addition, there may be a stock effect that acquires and releases only one of the icons. For example, four "color UP" icons may be acquired, and then four may be released in order to change the color in the title notice effect or the variable icon. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that events such as color changes are performed intensively, so that it is possible to further improve the entertainment of the production.

In the above explanation, there are a plurality of types of icons that can be acquired.
Not limited to this, only one type of icon may be acquired. When there is only one type of icon that can be acquired, a plurality of icons may be acquired at the opportunity of acquiring one, and when a predetermined number of icons are accumulated, a predetermined effect may be executed. With this configuration, you can give the fun of accumulating icons.

(About the production during the jackpot game)
Here, with reference to FIG. 79, the production performed during the jackpot game will be touched upon.
In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 7, it is configured to determine a high-probability gaming state until the jackpot lottery is performed 80 times after the completion of all jackpot games. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the effect of notifying whether the game is in the normal game state or the high-probability game state after the end of the jackpot game (so-called "promotion effect") is not performed, so that the player is notified during the jackpot game. There was a risk of giving a feeling of boredom.
Therefore, during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 79, an introduction image or the like of the character displayed in the variation effect or the like is displayed.
For example, in the first round of the jackpot game, the image of the character A and the introduction image of the character A are displayed (see FIG. 79 (a)), and in the second round of the jackpot game, the image and the character of the character B are displayed. The introduction image of B is displayed (see FIG. 79 (b)), and in the third round of the jackpot game, the image of character C and the introduction image of character C are displayed (see FIG. 79 (c)). As a result, the player can deepen his or her knowledge of the character displayed in the variable effect or the like, and can enjoy the jackpot game without feeling bored.

Further, in the ending time from the end of the last round game to the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 79 (d), the image of the character D and the subsequent transition to the high-probability game state are notified. An image of "RUSH rush" is displayed.
In addition to the above image, the warning image EG1 "Caution for forgetting to remove the card!" And the warning image EG2 "Game" that urges the prevention of excessive immersiveness in the game. The image "Be careful of getting into it!" Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to remove the card and prevent excessive game play.
In addition, it may be any thing that the predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied. For example, a game ball may be won in the first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15.
Further, the predetermined game privilege may be any kind. For example, it may be a hold icon or the variable icon. The hold icon and the variable icon may be the hold icon or the variable icon related to the first start port 14, or may be the hold icon or the variable icon related to the second start port 15.
Further, the acquisition effect may be any kind. For example, the image display device 31 may display the hold icon or the variable icon when the game ball wins the first start port 14 or the second start port 15.
Further, the emission effect may be anything. For example, the effect of shifting the hold icon to the variable icon display area 31c may be used.
Further, the predetermined effect may be any kind. For example, a variable effect based on a variable effect pattern may be used.
In addition, the first notification mode may be any. For example, a white icon may be displayed on the hold icon or the variable icon.
In addition, the second notification mode may be any. For example, the hold icon or the blue icon on the variable icon may be displayed.
Further, the specific acquired sound may be any kind. For example, it may be a specific winning sound output when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. Further, the case where a specific acquisition sound is not output may be a normal winning sound output when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15.

The display content of FIG. 79 (d) may be changed as appropriate. For example, when the game machine 1 is equipped with the "setting value function", even if the "effect suggesting the setting value" set in the game machine 1 is performed depending on the type of the character image displayed in FIG. 79 (d). Good.
Here, the "set value function" is, for example, composed of six stages of set values, and the ratio of determining a jackpot in the jackpot lottery differs for each stage. For example, "1/320" for a low-probability gaming state with a set value of 1, "1/310" for a low-probability gaming state with a set value 2, ... The ratio is "1/270", and the setting value 6 is the most advantageous setting value for the player. Then, any one of the set values of any one can be set by the game store (administrator of the game machine 1) from the set values of the six stages. By installing such a set value, it is possible to manage the ball with a certain degree of prediction according to the set value.
Further, the "effect suggesting a set value" means, for example, that the image of the character D in FIG. 79 (d) is a default image that does not particularly suggest a set value, and in addition to this, a plurality of types of images suggesting a set value Remember. Then, as an image to be displayed in the ending time from the end of the last round game to the end of the jackpot game, an image suggesting whether to use the default image or to suggest the set value according to the set value currently set in the game machine 1. Is determined based on a predetermined probability. This makes it possible to display an image suggesting a set value in the ending time from the end of the last round game to the end of the jackpot game. With this configuration, when the game machine 1 is equipped with the "setting value function", it is possible to prevent the player from being bored during the jackpot game including the ending time.

(About the production of high-probability time-saving game state)
In addition, although not shown in particular, the production performed in the high-probability time-saving game state will also be mentioned.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the high-probability time-saving game state is performed 80 times. That is, if the jackpot lottery is performed 80 times in the high-probability time-saving game state and the big-hit game is not won, the high-probability time-saving game state ends.
Therefore, even in the production performed in the high-probability time-saving game state, it is possible to further improve the game interest by making the effect different according to the number of games in the high-probability time-saving game state.
For example, it is difficult to execute the reach effect (of loss) up to 40 times, which has a relatively large margin until the end of the high-probability time-saving game state, and if it is lost, it is easy to execute the shortening fluctuation, and it is short. It is conceivable to digest the fluctuation effect.
On the other hand, after 41 rotations, when the end of the high-probability time-saving game state is approaching, it is easier to execute the (missing) reach effect than up to 40 times, and the variable effect takes a relatively long time. It is conceivable to digest. Further, after 41 rotations, the BGM may be changed to an up-tempo song to suggest that the high-probability time-saving game state is about to end.
The first game privilege may be anything. For example, it may be the right to execute the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. Further, the variable icon or the hold icon obtained by winning the game ball to the second starting port 15 may be used.
Further, the second game privilege may be any kind. For example, a prize ball whose payout is controlled by the payout control board 130 may be used. Further, the variable icon or the hold icon obtained by winning the game ball to the first starting port 14 may be used.
In addition, the privilege may be anything. For example, a prize ball whose payout is controlled by the payout control board 130 may be used.
In addition, the first privilege may be anything. For example, it may be the right to execute the jackpot determination process shown in FIG.
In addition, the second privilege may be anything. For example, a prize ball whose payout is controlled by the payout control board 130 may be used.
Further, the first acquisition state may be any. For example, it may be a state in which it is difficult for the auxiliary game to be performed, that is, a non-time saving game state.
Further, the second acquisition state may be any. For example, a state in which the auxiliary game is easily performed, that is, a time-saving game state may be used.
Further, the predetermined period may be any period. For example, it may be a predetermined time (for example, between 5S).

It should be noted that the effect performed in the high-probability time-saving game state is only an example, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, it is not necessary to change the effect between up to 40 times and after 41 rotations. Further, the effect may be changed in increments of 10 times. Further, the effect may be changed only for the remaining 10 times. In addition, since there is a relatively large margin up to 40 times, the "effect suggesting a set value" described in "Production during a big hit game" may be performed there.

<About other inventions and the like described in the above-described embodiment>
Hereinafter, other inventions and the like described in the present embodiment will be described.

In the conventional gaming machine, when the starting prize is established, the determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player is acquired, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and the variation effect according to the result of the determination is executed, and when the variation effect becomes a special result, a special game is executed. In the variable production, various productions are executed, and a device is made to raise the expectation that the special game is executed. Then, as such an effect, after stocking one or more benefits (for example, reach symbols), the stocked benefits are released to increase the expectation that the special game will be executed. (For example, refer to JP-A-2016-106719). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has room for improvement in order to further improve the production interest.

(A) As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, the main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the variable icon is executed, for example, for title advance notice effect in FIG. 47. When it is determined that the stock is executed, for example, it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the cut-in notice effect is executed), the game privilege (for example, when the stock for the variable icon and the stock for the title notice effect are executed, the color UP shown in FIG. An acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67) for acquiring an icon, for example, a button PUSH icon when executing the cut-in notice effect stock, and a predetermined release condition are satisfied after the acquisition is performed (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67). For example, the release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIGS. 68 and 69) that releases the acquired game privilege when the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the αth frame) and the release effect. (For example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the variable icon is to be executed, the effect of changing the color of the variable icon shown in FIG. 70 (b), for example, FIG. When it is determined in 47 that the stock for the title notice effect is to be executed, it is determined that the effect of changing the color of the SP reach title image SRG shown in FIG. 68 (o), for example, the stock for the cut-in notice effect is executed in FIG. 47. If so, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 69 (s) can be executed, and the predetermined game privilege (for example, the color UP icon, for example, the button PUSH icon) among the game benefits is the predetermined. A plurality of the predetermined effects that can be executed according to the game privilege are provided (for example, a color UP icon is provided with a plurality of release-time corresponding effects as shown in FIG. 66, and a button PUSH icon is provided with a post-release corresponding effect. It has more than one).
As a result, it is possible to have fun as to what kind of predetermined effect will be executed later when the predetermined game privilege is acquired. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(B) As a second configuration for solving the above problem, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, a main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 47 that the cut-in notice effect stock is executed, for example, for development effect in FIG. 47. When it is determined that the stock is executed), the game privilege (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the cut-in notice effect is executed, the “?” Icon shown in FIG. 66 (b), for example, for the development effect in FIG. 47). When it is determined that the stock is to be executed, the acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67) for acquiring the gimmick operation icon shown in FIG. 66A and the predetermined release condition after the acquisition is performed are satisfied. The release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIGS. 68 and 69) that releases the acquired game privilege when the game is established (for example, the αth frame in terms of the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect) and the said A predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the release effect (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 that the development effect stock is to be executed, the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) shown in FIG. 68 (l) It is possible to execute an effect of moving (falling) downward, for example, an effect of pressing the effect button 35 shown in FIG. 69 (r) when it is determined in FIG. 47 to execute the stock for the cut-in notice effect). Yes, the content of the predetermined effect is suggested in the release effect (for example, the gimmick operation icon KG1 shown in FIG. 69 (k) is displayed as the icon release image HG, for example, a button from the “?” Icon shown in FIG. 69 (q). The PUSH icon is made to appear and displayed as an icon emission image HG), and the predetermined effect can be executed after executing the suggestion.
Thus, after to recognize or advance any given effect to the player is performed, it is possible to perform a predetermined effect, likely effect player to understand can be executed. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(C) As a third configuration for solving the above problem, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, the main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 47 that the title advance effect stock is executed, for example, the development effect stock in FIG. 47. (For example, if it is determined in FIG. 47 that the title notice production stock is executed, it is determined that the color UP icon shown in FIG. 66, for example, the development production stock is executed in FIG. 47). The acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIGS. 67 and 71) for acquiring the gimmick operation icon) and the predetermined release condition are satisfied after the acquisition is performed (for example, from the start of the variation effect). The release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIGS. 68, 69, and 71) that releases the acquired game privilege when the number of display frames is the αth frame) and the game released by the release effect. Predetermined effect according to the privilege (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for title notice effect is to be executed, the effect of changing the color of the SP reach title image SRG shown in FIG. 71 (o), for example, development in FIG. 47. When it is determined that the production stock is to be executed, the first decorative member 33a (effect) shown in FIG. 71 (l) can be moved (falling) downward), and the acquisition effect can be executed. In the above, a plurality of the game benefits can be acquired by satisfying the predetermined acquisition condition of 1 (for example, as shown in FIGS. 71 (c-1) and (d-1), the effect button 35 is pressed once. A color UP icon and a gimmick operation icon can be obtained), and a plurality of the game benefits cannot be released due to the satisfaction of the predetermined release condition of 1 in the release effect (for example, FIGS. 71 (k), As shown by n), it is released only one by one).
As a result, in the acquisition effect, since a plurality of game benefits can be acquired by one operation of the effect button 35, it is possible to give the player a feeling of gain and improve the expectation that the jackpot game will be given. it can. On the other hand, in the release effect, even if the time (or the number of display frames) set as the release timing of the icon arrives, only one game privilege is released, so the player should not feel lost. At the same time, it is possible to make it easier to recognize what kind of predetermined effect has been performed for one game privilege. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(D) As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, the main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), the effect control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied (for example, the cut-in notice effect stock is executed in FIG. 47, for example, the variable icon in FIG. 47. When it is determined that the stock for the game is executed), the game privilege (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the cut-in notice effect is executed, the “?” Icon shown in FIG. 66, for example, the stock for the variable icon in FIG. 47. The acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67) for acquiring the color UP icon when it is determined to execute, and the predetermined release condition are satisfied after the acquisition is performed (for example, the start of the variation effect). The release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIGS. 69 and 70) that releases the acquired game privilege when (the number of display frames from the above is the αth frame) and the game privilege released by the release effect. A predetermined effect according to (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the cut-in notice effect is to be executed, the effect button 35 shown in FIG. 69 (r) is pressed, for example, for the variable icon in FIG. 47. When it is determined that the stock is to be executed, it is possible to execute the effect of changing the color of the variable icon shown in FIG. 70 (a), and among the game benefits, a predetermined game privilege (for example, shown in FIG. 66). In the "?" Icon and the color UP icon), the content of the predetermined effect is not clearly notified from the execution of the acquisition effect to the execution of the release effect (for example, the "?" Icon is It is not possible to recognize the release response effect from the execution of the acquisition effect to the execution of the release effect, and the color UP icon displays the release response effect from the execution of the acquisition effect to the execution of the release effect. Cannot be recognized).
As a result, it is possible to have fun as to what kind of predetermined effect will be executed later when the predetermined game privilege is acquired. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(E) As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, the main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 47 that the cut-in advance notice effect stock is executed, for example, for the development effect in FIG. 47. When it is determined that the stock is executed), the game privilege (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the variable icon is executed, the color UP icon is executed, for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the development effect is executed. Is an acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67) for acquiring the gimmick operation icon) and a predetermined release condition is satisfied after the acquisition is performed (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variation effect). A release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIGS. 69 and 70) that releases the acquired game privilege when the α-frame is reached, and a predetermined effect (for example, the release effect according to the game privilege released by the release effect). FIG. 47 shows an effect of changing the color of the variable icon shown in FIG. 70 (a) when it is determined to execute the variable icon stock, and FIG. 47 shows an effect of determining that the development effect stock is executed. It is possible to execute the effect of moving (falling) the first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) shown in 68 (l) downward, and among the game benefits, a predetermined game privilege (for example, shown in FIG. 66). In the color UP icon, the gimmick operation icon), from the execution of the acquisition effect to the execution of the release effect, none of the contents of the predetermined effect is notified in an unclear manner (for example, the color UP icon is a color UP icon). It is possible to recognize that the color change effect is performed from the execution of the acquisition effect to the execution of the release effect, and the gimmick operation icon is the first decorative member 33a (from the execution of the acquisition effect to the execution of the release effect. It can be recognized that the production character) moves (falls) downward).
As a result, when the predetermined game privilege is acquired, the player can be made to recognize in advance what kind of predetermined effect will be executed later. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(F) As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, the main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies the first acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 47 that the cut-in notice effect stock is executed, for example, the development effect is shown in FIG. 47. When it is determined that the timer is executed), the first game privilege (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 to execute the cut-in notice effect stock, the button PUSH icon shown in FIG. 66, for example, for the development effect in FIG. 47). An acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67) for acquiring a gimmick operation icon when it is determined to execute stock, and a predetermined release condition are satisfied after the acquisition is performed (for example, a variable effect). The release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIGS. 68 and 69) that releases the first game privilege acquired when the number of display frames from the start is the αth frame) and the release effect are released. A predetermined effect according to the first game privilege (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the cut-in notice effect is to be executed, the effect button 35 shown in FIG. 69 (r) is pressed, for example. When it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for development effect is to be executed, the first decorative member 33a (effect object) shown in FIG. 68 (l) moves (falls) downward) and the first acquisition. When a second acquisition condition different from the condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined in FIG. 54 that the change timer effect is executed, for example, it is determined in FIG. 54 that the event timer effect is executed), the second game privilege (for example, in FIG. 62). The white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown, so-called "timer icon") is acquired, and the period in the acquired second game privilege (for example, "5 seconds left" of the white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown in FIG. 62). Update effect (for example, timer effect) to update and post-update effect after updating the period (for example, "0 seconds left" The effect to be executed after that, the variable icon change effect shown in FIG. 62 (d) and the SPSP reach effect shown in FIG. 63 (e)) can be executed, and in the predetermined effect, a predetermined one A single effect such as pressing the effect button 35 in the case of a button PUSH icon is generated by performing a predetermined effect (for example, in the case of a gimmick operation icon, the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) moves downward. (A single effect such as (falling) occurs), in the post-update effect, a plurality of post-update effects (for example, in the timer effect, the effect executed after "0 seconds left" is shown in FIG. ), The variable icon change effect, the SPSP reach effect shown in FIG. 63 (e), and the like), one of the post-update effects is performed.
As a result, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect in which it is easy to predict the content of the effect to be executed and an updated effect in which it is difficult to predict the content of the effect to be executed, so that it is possible to execute a variety of effects. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(G) As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, the main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies the first acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 47 that the cut-in advance notice effect stock is executed, for example, the development effect is shown in FIG. 47. When it is determined that the timer is executed), the first game privilege (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 to execute the cut-in notice effect stock, the button PUSH icon shown in FIG. 66, for example, for the development effect in FIG. 47). An acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67) for acquiring a gimmick operation icon when it is determined to execute stock, and a predetermined release condition are satisfied after the acquisition is performed (for example, a variable effect). The release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIGS. 68 and 69) that releases the first game privilege acquired when the number of display frames from the start is the αth frame) and the release effect are released. A predetermined effect according to the first game privilege (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the cut-in notice effect is to be executed, the effect button 35 shown in FIG. 69 (r) is pressed, for example. When it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for development effect is to be executed, the first decorative member 33a (effect object) shown in FIG. 68 (l) moves (falls) downward) and the first acquisition. When a second acquisition condition different from the condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined in FIG. 54 that the change timer effect is executed, for example, it is determined in FIG. 54 that the event timer effect is executed), the second game privilege (for example, in FIG. 62). The white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown, so-called "timer icon") is acquired, and the numerical information in the acquired second game privilege (for example, "5 seconds left" of the white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown in FIG. 62. ) Is updated toward the final value (for example, "0 seconds left" of the white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown in FIG. 62). An update effect (for example, a timer effect) and a post-update effect after updating the numerical information to the final value (for example, an effect executed after “0 seconds left”, FIG. 62 (d). The variable icon change effect and the SPSP reach effect shown in FIG. 63 (e) can be executed, and the first game privilege notifies the player in a manner in which the execution timing of the predetermined effect cannot be recognized. (For example, the button PUSH icon and the gimmick operation icon describe the production content of the effect corresponding to the release, but do not describe when it is executed), and the second game privilege is the player. Is notified in a recognizable manner of the execution timing of the post-update effect (for example, the white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown in FIG. 62 displays "5 seconds left" and then the subtraction of the timer time is started. It is recognizable that the post-update effect will be executed when the subtraction result is "0 seconds left").
As a result, from the first game privilege, it is possible to give fun such as when the predetermined effect is executed, and from the second game privilege, it is possible to recognize in advance when the post-update effect is executed. Because it can be done, it is possible to perform a variety of productions. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(H) As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, the main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies the first acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 47 that the cut-in notice effect stock is executed, for example, the development effect is shown in FIG. 47. When it is determined that the timer is executed), the first game privilege (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 to execute the cut-in notice effect stock, the button PUSH icon shown in FIG. 66, for example, for the development effect in FIG. 47). An acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67) for acquiring a gimmick operation icon when it is determined to execute stock, and a predetermined release condition are satisfied after the acquisition is performed (for example, a variable effect). The release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIGS. 68 and 69) that releases the first game privilege acquired when the number of display frames from the start is the αth frame) and the release effect are released. A predetermined effect according to the first game privilege (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the cut-in notice effect is to be executed, the effect button 35 shown in FIG. 69 (r) is pressed, for example. When it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for development effect is to be executed, the first decorative member 33a (effect object) shown in FIG. 68 (l) moves (falls) downward) and the first acquisition. When a second acquisition condition different from the condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined in FIG. 54 that the change timer effect is executed, for example, it is determined in FIG. 54 that the event timer effect is executed), the second game privilege (for example, in FIG. 62). The white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown, so-called "timer icon") is acquired, and the period in the acquired second game privilege (for example, "5 seconds left" of the white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown in FIG. 62). Update effect (for example, timer effect) to update and post-update effect after updating the period (for example, "0 seconds left" The effect to be executed after that, the variable icon change effect shown in FIG. 62 (d) and the SPSP reach effect shown in FIG. 63 (e)) can be executed, and the content of the predetermined effect is suggested in the release effect. (For example, "?" Shown in FIG. 69 (q). The button PUSH icon appears from the icon and is displayed as the button PUSH icon HG, for example, the gimmick operation icon KG1 shown in FIG. 68 (k) is displayed as the icon emission image HG), and after executing the suggestion, the predetermined effect is performed. After executing and updating the period in the update effect, without suggesting the content of the post-update effect (for example, after "0 seconds left" in FIG. 62 (c), FIG. 62 (d) ), The display is limited to "GO !!", and it is not suggested that the variable icon change effect is executed.) The post-update effect (for example, the variable icon change effect) is executed.
As a result, in the post-update effect, it is possible to give pleasure such as what kind of post-update effect is performed until the post-update effect is executed, and in the predetermined effect, it is recognized what kind of predetermined effect is executed in advance. Since it can be made to perform, it is possible to execute a variety of productions. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(I) As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a big hit game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, the main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 51 that the tempai effect stock is executed, for example, the stock for effect 2 determined in FIG. 51). (For example, the single button hit icon and the continuous button hit icon shown in FIG. 72) are acquired (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) and a predetermined release after the acquisition is performed. When the condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the αth frame), the release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 74) that releases the acquired game privilege and the release A predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, an effect of pressing the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to reach the reach (tempai effect), the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (o) and (p)). It is possible to execute the effect of repeatedly hitting to drop the gimmick (decision effect 2)), and after the game privilege is acquired by the acquisition effect and before the predetermined release condition is satisfied. The acquired game privilege (for example, a button single hit icon) can be notified by a predetermined notification means (for example, an image display device 31) (for example, can be displayed on the image display device 31 as an acquired icon KG1), and the game privilege. Can be changed from the first notification mode (for example, a button single hit icon) to the second notification mode (for example, a button repeated hit icon) while being notified by the predetermined notification means.
As a result, the game privilege may change from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, so that it is interesting to change to the second notification mode even after the acquisition of the game privilege. be able to. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(J) As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a big hit game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, the main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means has a first effect mode (for example, an effect mode in a normal gaming state) and a second effect mode (for example) different from the first effect mode. For example, it is possible to control with a high-probability time-saving game state (effect mode), and a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined in FIG. 47 that the cut-in notice effect stock is executed, for example, in FIG. 51 for tempai effect. When it is determined that the stock is executed), it is determined that the game privilege (for example, if it is determined in FIG. 47 that the cut-in notice effect stock is executed, the button PUSH icon is executed, for example, in FIG. 51, the tempai effect stock is executed. In the case of a button single hit icon), an acquisition effect (for example, an acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67, for example, an acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) and a predetermined release condition are satisfied after the acquisition is performed (for example, a variable effect). The release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 69, for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 74) that releases the acquired game privilege when the number of display frames from the start of the above is the αth frame) and the said A predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the release effect (for example, when it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the cut-in notice effect is to be executed, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 69 (s), for example, FIG. When it is determined in 51 that the stock for tempai production is to be executed, the tempai production shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and 74 (l) can be executed, and after the game privilege is acquired by the acquisition effect. By the time the predetermined release condition is satisfied, the acquired game privilege (for example, button PUSH icon, button single hit icon) can be notified by a predetermined notification means (for example, image display device 31) (for example, If it is a button PUSH icon, it can be displayed on the image display device 31 as an acquired icon KG4. If it is a button single hit icon, it can be displayed on the image display device 31 as an acquired icon KG1), and the game privilege notified by the predetermined notification means is the first effect mode and the second effect. The notification mode differs depending on the mode (for example, although there is no difference in function such as operating the effect button 35 in any case, it is displayed by the icon "button PUSH" in the first stock effect and in the second stock effect. Displayed with the icon "single button press").
As a result, whether it is a game privilege (icon that prompts the operation of the effect button 35) in the first stock effect in the normal game state, or a game privilege (icon that prompts the operation of the effect button 35) in the second stock effect in the high probability time-saving game state. ), It becomes easier to distinguish visually, and the game state can be grasped from the game privilege. In particular, since all of them have the same functional aspect such as operating the effect button 35, different notification modes will lead to promotion of understanding of the player. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(K) As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120) and the sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, the sound output device 32) are provided, and the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, Tempai in FIG. 51). When it is determined that the production stock is executed, for example, it is determined in FIG. 51 that the production 2 stock is executed), a game privilege (for example, the button single hit icon and the button repeated hit icon shown in FIG. 72) is acquired (for example, FIG. The game privilege acquired when the predetermined release condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the αth frame) after the acquisition is performed. The release effect to be released (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 74) and the predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the release effect (for example, the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and 74 (l) are pressed to reach. The effect (tempai effect), the effect of repeatedly hitting the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (o) and (p) to drop the gimmick (decision effect 2)) can be executed, and the sound output means is the acquisition effect. When the game privilege is acquired, a specific acquired sound may be output or the specific acquired sound may not be output (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, when the button repeated hit icon is acquired, " The sound "Kakeen ♪" is output, and when the button single hit icon is acquired, the sound "Pon ♪" is output).
As a result, even if the player does not visually recognize the image display device 31, it becomes easy to recognize what has been acquired as a game privilege, which leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(L) As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a big hit game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, a main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 51 that the tempai effect stock is executed, for example, the stock for effect 2 is determined in FIG. 51). (For example, the acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring the game privilege (for example, the button single hit icon and the button repeated hit icon shown in FIG. 72) and the predetermined release after the acquisition is performed. When the condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the αth frame), the release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 74) that releases the acquired game privilege and the release A predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, an effect of pressing the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to reach the reach (tempai effect), the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (o) and 74 (p)). It is possible to execute the effect of repeatedly hitting to drop the gimmick (decision effect 2)), and the game privilege includes the first game privilege (for example, the button repeated hit icon) and the first game privilege. Has a different second game privilege (for example, a button single hit icon), and in the acquisition effect, a single first game privilege and a plurality of the second games are obtained by satisfying the predetermined acquisition condition of 1. It is possible to acquire a privilege (for example, it is possible to acquire one button continuous hit icon and two button single hit icons by one operation of the effect button 35).
As a result, in the acquisition effect, since a plurality of icons can be acquired by one operation of the effect button 35, it is possible to give the player a feeling of gain and to improve the expectation that the jackpot game will be given. ..

(M) As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a big hit game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, a main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 51 that the tempai effect stock is executed, for example, the stock for effect 2 is determined in FIG. 51). (For example, the acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring the game privilege (for example, the button single hit icon and the button repeated hit icon shown in FIG. 72) and the predetermined release after the acquisition is performed. When the condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the αth frame), the release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 74) that releases the acquired game privilege and the release A predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, an effect of pressing the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to reach the reach (tempai effect), the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (o) and 74 (p)). It is possible to execute the effect of repeatedly hitting to drop the gimmick (decision effect 2)), and the game privilege includes the first game privilege (for example, the button repeated hit icon) and the first game privilege. Has a different second game privilege (for example, a button single hit icon), and the number of privilege (for example, the effect button) in the case of acquiring the first game privilege and the case of acquiring the second game privilege. It is possible to make the number of operations of 35 different) (the button repeated hit icon can operate the effect button 35 more than the button single hit icon).
As a result, it is possible to play a game in hopes of acquiring a game privilege that can acquire more benefits. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(N) As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a big hit game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, a main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 51 that the tempai effect stock is executed, for example, the stock for effect 2 determined in FIG. 51). (For example, the acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring the game privilege (for example, the button single hit icon and the button repeated hit icon shown in FIG. 72) and the predetermined release after the acquisition is performed. When the condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the αth frame), the release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 74) that releases the acquired game privilege and the release A predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, an effect of pressing the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to reach the reach (tempai effect), the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (o) and 74 (p)). It is possible to execute the effect of repeatedly hitting to drop the gimmick (decision effect 2)), and the game privilege includes the first game privilege (for example, the button repeated hit icon) and the first game privilege. Has a different second game privilege (for example, a button single hit icon), and a first privilege (for example, a button single hit icon) that can be obtained when the first game privilege is acquired and when the second game privilege is acquired. , The number of icons given) is the same (for example, one icon can be obtained for both), but the number of second benefits that can be obtained (for example, the number of operations of the effect button 35) can be different. (For example, the button repeated hit icon operates the effect button 35 more times than the button single hit icon).
As a result, it is possible to play a game in hopes of acquiring a game privilege that can acquire more benefits. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(O) As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a big hit game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, a main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 47 that the cut-in notice effect stock is executed, and the tempai effect stock is determined in FIG. 51. When it is determined to be executed), an acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67, for example, the button PUSH icon shown in FIG. 66, for example, the button single hit icon and the button repeated hit icon shown in FIG. The game privilege acquired when the predetermined release condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the αth frame) after the acquisition is performed. A release effect to be emitted (for example, a release effect shown in FIG. 69, for example, a release effect shown in FIG. 74) and a predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the release effect (for example, a cut shown in FIG. 69 (s)). It is possible to execute an in-effect, for example, an effect of pressing a button shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and 74 (l) to reach a reach (tempai effect), and the acquisition effect includes a first acquisition state (for example, an acquisition state). It has a first stock effect) and a second acquisition state (for example, a second stock effect) different from the first acquisition state, and in the first acquisition state, a predetermined period (for example, a variation of 1) is provided. It is difficult to acquire a plurality of the game benefits in the production) (for example, in the first stock production, it is impossible to acquire a plurality of icons with one variation), but in the second acquisition state, a predetermined period of time. (For example, in the first variation effect), it is easy to acquire the plurality of game benefits (for example, in the second stock effect, it is possible to acquire a plurality of icons with one variation).
As a result, it is possible to execute different acquisition effects for the first acquisition effect and the second acquisition effect, which leads to further improvement of the effect of the effect.

(P) As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), a normal game state (for example, a normal game state), and the normal game state. A game state control means (for example, a main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state) different from the above, and an effect control means for executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 47 that the cut-in notice effect stock is executed, and the tempai effect stock is determined in FIG. 51. When it is determined to be executed), an acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67, for example, the button PUSH icon shown in FIG. 66, for example, the button single hit icon and the button repeated hit icon shown in FIG. The game privilege acquired when the predetermined release condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the αth frame) after the acquisition is performed. A release effect to be emitted (for example, a release effect shown in FIG. 69, for example, a release effect shown in FIG. 74) and a predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the release effect (for example, a cut shown in FIG. 69 (s)). It is possible to execute an in-effect, for example, an effect of pressing a button shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and 74 (l) to reach a reach (tempai effect), and the game privilege includes a first game privilege (for example, a tempai effect). It has a button PUSH icon) and a second game privilege (for example, a button single hit icon) different from the first game privilege, and in the normal game state, the second game privilege is higher than the first game privilege. It is easy to acquire game benefits (for example, in the first stock effect executed in the normal game state, the button PUSH icon is acquired, and the button single hit icon is not acquired), and in the specific game state, it is higher than the second game privilege. It is easy to acquire the first game privilege (for example, in the second stock production executed in the high probability time saving game state, the button single hit icon is acquired, Button PUSH icon is not acquired).
As a result, the game benefits that are easy to obtain differ depending on the game state, which leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(Q) As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, a main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 51 that the tempai effect stock is executed, for example, the stock for effect 2 determined in FIG. 51). (For example, the acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring the game privilege (for example, the button single hit icon and the button repeated hit icon shown in FIG. 72) and the predetermined release after the acquisition is performed. When the condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the αth frame), the release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 74) that releases the acquired game privilege and the release A predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, an effect of pressing the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to reach the player (tempai effect), the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (o) and 74 (p)). It is possible to execute the effect of repeatedly hitting to drop the gimmick (decision effect 2)), and it is possible to acquire a plurality of the game benefits. In the release effect, in the order of acquisition in the acquisition effect. There are cases where the game benefits are released (for example, FIGS. 73 and 74) and cases where the game benefits are released in a different order from the order in which they were acquired in the acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 76). And.
As a result, for example, it may be released from the game privilege acquired later, so that the player can be given unexpectedness. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(R) As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a big hit game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, a main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 51 that the tempai effect stock is executed, for example, the stock for effect 2 determined in FIG. 51). (For example, the acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring the game privilege (for example, the button single hit icon and the button repeated hit icon shown in FIG. 72) and the predetermined release after the acquisition is performed. When the condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the αth frame), the release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 74) that releases the acquired game privilege and the release A predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, an effect of pressing the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to reach the reach (tempai effect), the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (o) and 74 (p)). It is possible to execute the effect of repeatedly hitting to drop the gimmick (decision effect 2)), and the variable effect can be ended by the stop effect of temporarily stopping the identification information and then displaying the stop. The game privilege can be obtained even when the stop effect is being executed (for example, in the second stock effect, when the effect symbol 38 is temporarily stopped or the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed. You can get the icon even when you are doing it).
As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(S) As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a big hit game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, a main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), the effect control means satisfies a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, it is determined in FIG. 51 that the tempai effect stock is executed, for example, the stock for effect 2 determined in FIG. 51). (For example, the acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring the game privilege (for example, the button single hit icon and the button repeated hit icon shown in FIG. 72) and the predetermined release after the acquisition is performed. A release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 74) that releases the acquired game privilege when the condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the αth frame) and the release. A predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, an effect of pressing the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to reach the reach (tempai effect), the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (o) and 74 (p)). It is possible to execute the effect of repeatedly hitting to drop the gimmick (decision effect 2)), and the game privilege can be released in the plurality of the variable effects, and the first in the variable effect. When the special game is reached without releasing the game privilege in the variable effect (for example, when the variable effect pattern 81 is performed without using the icon in the second stock effect), the line is performed after the special game is completed. It is possible to release the game privilege that was not released in the second variation effect (for example, variation effect pattern 58) in the variation effect.
As a result, even if the special game is performed without releasing the game privilege, it can be released in the variable effect after the end of the special game, so that the player does not feel lost. .. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

(T) As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (for example, a big hit game) advantageous to the player, a starting area. (For example, the acquisition means (for example, the main control board 110) for acquiring the determination information (for example, the special figure determination information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 14 and the second start port 15, and the above. A determination means (for example, a main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information (for example, a jackpot determination process), and an effect control means that executes a variation effect according to the result of the determination. (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means has a game privilege (for example, the button single hit icon shown in FIG. 72) when a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied (for example, the effect button 35 is operated). The acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 77) for acquiring the button repeated hit icon) and the predetermined release condition are satisfied after the acquisition is performed (for example, α in terms of the number of display frames from the start of the variation effect). A release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 78) that releases the acquired game privilege when the frame is formed, and a predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 78 (j)) according to the game privilege released by the release effect. ), And the effect of dropping the gimmick by hitting the button indicated by (k) (decision effect 2)), and the game privilege can be obtained up to a predetermined upper limit number. The game benefits include a first game privilege (for example, a privilege for operating the effect button 35) and a second game privilege (for example, a privilege for giving an icon) different from the first game privilege. When the predetermined acquisition condition of 1 is satisfied after reaching the upper limit of the predetermined number, only the second game privilege is granted without granting the first game privilege (for example, FIG. 77, as shown in FIG. 78, when the effect button 35 is operated after reaching the maximum number of icons to be acquired, only the icon is given and the added icon is not released).
As a result, the player is apparently given the second game privilege, so that it is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of loss. Therefore, it leads to further improvement of the production interest.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is set to shift to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all jackpot games, but the first jackpot 16 opened in a specific round game of the jackpot game. Alternatively, it may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game when the gaming ball passes through a specific area provided inside the second big winning opening 17.

In addition, when the player shifts to the high-probability game state after all the jackpot games are completed and wins the fall lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability game state, the high-probability game state is normally terminated. It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

In addition, when the type of the jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, the game shifts to the low probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, and when the type of the jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol, the next time after the end of the jackpot game. It may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state that continues until the jackpot game.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the first special symbol has priority. It may be executed.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but can also be used for rotating cylinder type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used for a rock game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include the meaning equivalent to the scope of claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 Game machine 31 Image display device 32 Audio output device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110b main ROM
110c main RAM
120 Production control board 120a Sub CPU
120b sub ROM
120c sub RAM
150 Image control unit

Claims (1)

In a game machine that can perform special games that are advantageous to the player
An acquisition means for acquiring judgment information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting area,
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information,
An effect control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination,
Equipped with a sound output means capable of outputting sound,
The effect control means
An acquisition effect that acquires game benefits when certain acquisition conditions are met,
When the predetermined release condition is satisfied after the acquisition is performed, the release effect of releasing the acquired game privilege and the release effect
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the release effect.
The sound output means
A game machine that may output a specific acquired sound or may not output the specific acquired sound when the game privilege is acquired in the acquired effect.